TW495885B - Method and apparatus for processing a microelectronic workpiece at an elevated temperature - Google Patents

Method and apparatus for processing a microelectronic workpiece at an elevated temperature Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW495885B
TW495885B TW90102866A TW90102866A TW495885B TW 495885 B TW495885 B TW 495885B TW 90102866 A TW90102866 A TW 90102866A TW 90102866 A TW90102866 A TW 90102866A TW 495885 B TW495885 B TW 495885B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
heat
heat source
microelectronic workpiece
workpiece
row
Prior art date
Application number
TW90102866A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Robert A Weaver
Gregory J Wilson
Paul R Mchugh
Vladimir Zila
Original Assignee
Semitool Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US09/501,002 external-priority patent/US6471913B1/en
Priority claimed from US09/733,608 external-priority patent/US6780374B2/en
Application filed by Semitool Inc filed Critical Semitool Inc
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TW495885B publication Critical patent/TW495885B/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L21/00Processes or apparatus adapted for the manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or solid state devices or of parts thereof
    • H01L21/67Apparatus specially adapted for handling semiconductor or electric solid state devices during manufacture or treatment thereof; Apparatus specially adapted for handling wafers during manufacture or treatment of semiconductor or electric solid state devices or components ; Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
    • H01L21/67005Apparatus not specifically provided for elsewhere
    • H01L21/67011Apparatus for manufacture or treatment
    • H01L21/67098Apparatus for thermal treatment
    • H01L21/67103Apparatus for thermal treatment mainly by conduction

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Condensed Matter Physics & Semiconductors (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
  • Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
  • Power Engineering (AREA)
  • Container, Conveyance, Adherence, Positioning, Of Wafer (AREA)
  • Electrodes Of Semiconductors (AREA)
  • Drying Of Semiconductors (AREA)

Abstract

An apparatus and method for processing a microelectronic workpiece at an elevated temperature. In one embodiment, the apparatus includes a workpiece support positioned to engage and support the microelectronic workpiece during operation. The apparatus can further include a heat source having a solid engaging surface positioned to engage a surface of the microelectronic workpiece with at least one of the heat source and the workpiece support being movable relative to the other between a first position with the microelectronic workpiece contacting the engaging surface of the heat source and a second position with the microelectronic workpiece spaced apart from the engaging surface. The heat source is sized to transfer heat to the microelectronic workpiece at a rate sufficient to thermally process a selected material of the microelectronic workpiece when the microelectronic workpiece is engaged with the heat source. A heat sink can be positioned at least proximate to the heat source to cool both the heat source and the microelectronic workpiece.

Description

495¾^ 495¾^ A7 B7 修正 五、發明說明( [發明之領域] 本發明大致地係有關一種應用於在高溫下處理微電子 工件之方法與裝置。 [發明背景] 在由像是半導體晶圓之微電子工件所得的半導體積體 電路與其他微電子物件製作過程中,經常會需要在基板上 提供多重的金屬薄層,以作爲該積體電路上各種裝置電性 相互耦接之互連金屬物。傳統上是採用鋁質來作爲這種連 接,不過現已認知銅質金屬物可爲較適者。銅質連接確有 助於減低目前的鋁質技術裡所遭遇的複數個問題。 微電子製作產業藉由鑲嵌(damascene)及/或樣式化薄板 電鍍製程而探求採用銅質作爲互連金屬化物,其中孔洞(如 通道)、溝渠與其他凹處會被用來產生所欲之銅質樣式。在 典型的鑲嵌製程中,會對晶圓施加一介電層並於晶圓上構 築出複數個凹處。接著會在該介電層上沉置一金屬種源層 與阻障/黏附層,並而產生複數個凹處。該金屬種源層是用 於在後續的金屬電鍍步驟中導接電流。較佳地,該金屬種 源層係一極薄之金屬,可利用眾多製程方式之一而施加。 例如,可利用物理氣相沉積或化學氣相沉積製程而得該金 屬性之金屬種源層,以產生厚度約爲1〇〇〇埃或略薄之薄層 。該金屬種源層亦可按銅質、金質、鎳質、鈀質和大多數 的他種金屬所構成。該金屬種源層相符於該晶圓之表面, 包括其複數個凹處,或是其他各項陷落或高起之裝置特性 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) % 訂---------線! ^ 1 1· ϋ 1« n H I _ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495^ Pf年月/h曰 修正 Α7 Β7 二系3¾說明( (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 在單一銅質電鍍鑲嵌製程裡,一般是採用兩項電鍍作 業。首先,將某一銅質層電鍍在該種源層上以構成一覆毯 層。該覆毯層會塡充溝渠或其他定義出該介電層內水平性 連接接線的凹處。接著對該第一覆毯層平面化(例如’藉化 學機械方式平面化),以移除彼些延伸高於諸溝渠的各部分 ,讓諸溝渠得以塡滿銅質。然後供置第二介電層以覆蓋住 晶圓表面,並且在該第二介電層內構築出凹處通道。並配 置妥放這些凹處通道俾對齊某些既塡溝渠。接著’對該第 二介電層的表面施加第二種源層和第二銅質覆毯層’以塡 滿複數個通道。按此’這些通道即可提供作爲原先水平性 互連層與後續施加之水平性互連層間的垂直性連接。銅質 薄膜的電子化學式沉積作業因而成爲製作高效能爲電子產 品裡一項重要的製程步驟。 另一方面,可在通稱爲「雙鑲嵌」的製程中,同時地 於介電層內蝕刻出諸溝渠與通道。接著會如上述般,以屏 障層、種源層與塡滿/毯覆層來處理這些特徵處,這些薄層 會同時地塡滿沉置於溝渠底部上的複數個溝渠與通道。然 後如上述般拋除掉過多的材質,以產生複數個內置導體。 因構成有金屬結構,故銅質金屬化的機械性質極爲重 要。而當有關在化學機械拋光處理過程中會對銅質金屬化 機械性質所產生的影響時,這點會特別地顯著。銅質薄膜 於晶圓間和晶圓內的晶粒大小變動性,會負面地影響到化 學機械處理的拋光率以及拋光後銅質結構之表面的最終均 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 ff年6獻日%正 B7 〜nr補无: ' " 五發戦明() 勻度。在此會極爲希望該銅質薄膜內爲大型的晶粒尺寸與 低度的晶粒尺寸變動性。 銅質金屬化特徵處的電子性質,對於相關微電子裝置 的效能而言也是極爲重要。如果銅質金屬化展現出過度而 最終會在某一或複數個金屬化特徵處裡造成開~路或短路情 況之電子移離現象的話’則這些裝置或將失效故障。而會 對次微米金屬線路的電子移離阻抗產生極大影響之一因素 爲所沉積金屬的晶粒尺寸。适是因爲相較於晶粒間移離’ 發生晶粒邊界移離現象之作用能量係遠低於彼者。 爲達到所欲之銅質金屬化電子特徵,各個沉積毯覆層 的晶粒結構會經一退火程序而爲改變。這項退火程序傳統 上被視爲會要求爲執行某項個別的製程步驟,其中半導體 晶圓會承受到約攝氏400度的高溫所處理。目前僅有相當 少的可用退火裝置一般是獨立式批次單元,通常會被設計 用來對放置在晶圓船架上的晶圓進行批次的製程作業。 一種單一性晶圓退火裝置可如美國專利號6,136,163, 且其所有人爲Cheung所揭示者。該裝置包括一室體,其 內包封有一冷卻平板,和一位於該冷卻平板之下的加熱器 平板。該加熱器平板會再被某一加熱器及一浮撐平板所隔 間與環繞。該浮撐平板包括可突出架撐起該加熱器與該加 熱器平板藉以支撐晶圓的諸支撐腳針。該些支撐腳針可向 上移動以將晶圓移近該冷卻平板,和向下移動以將晶圓移 近或靠接該加熱器平板。這種裝置的一項潛在缺點爲該室 體包封著大型容積,而對此塡充淸除氣體及/或處理氣體或將 ____^____ 本纸張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)495¾ ^ 495¾ ^ A7 B7 Amendment V. Description of the Invention ([Field of Invention] The present invention is generally related to a method and apparatus for processing microelectronic workpieces at high temperatures. [Background of the Invention] In the semiconductor wafer During the fabrication of semiconductor integrated circuits and other microelectronic objects obtained from microelectronic workpieces, it is often necessary to provide multiple thin metal layers on a substrate as interconnecting metal objects that are electrically coupled to each other on the integrated circuit. .Aluminum has traditionally been used for this connection, but copper metal objects are now recognized as suitable. Copper connections do help reduce multiple problems encountered in current aluminum technology. Microelectronics Manufacturing The industry seeks to use copper as an interconnect metallization through damascene and / or patterned sheet metal plating processes, where holes (such as channels), trenches and other recesses will be used to produce the desired copper pattern. In a typical damascene process, a dielectric layer is applied to the wafer and a plurality of recesses are formed on the wafer. A metal seed source layer and a metal seed layer are then deposited on the dielectric layer. Barrier / adhesive layer and generate a plurality of recesses. The metal seed source layer is used to conduct current in the subsequent metal plating step. Preferably, the metal seed source layer is an extremely thin metal, which can be used It can be applied in one of many manufacturing methods. For example, a physical metal seed layer can be obtained by a physical vapor deposition or chemical vapor deposition process to produce a thin layer with a thickness of about 1000 angstroms or slightly thinner. The metal seed source layer can also be made of copper, gold, nickel, palladium and most other metals. The metal seed source layer corresponds to the surface of the wafer, including a plurality of recesses, or It is the characteristics of other devices that sink or rise (please read the notes on the back before filling this page)% Order --------- line! ^ 1 1 · ϋ 1 «n HI _ This paper size Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 495 ^ Pf year / h amend A7 Β7 second series 3¾ instructions ((Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) on single copper plating In the damascene process, two plating operations are generally used. First, a copper layer is plated on the A blanket layer is formed on the source layer. The blanket layer can fill trenches or other recesses that define horizontal connection wiring in the dielectric layer. Then the first blanket layer is planarized (for example, Mechanical planarization) to remove portions that extend above the trenches so that the trenches are filled with copper. Then a second dielectric layer is provided to cover the surface of the wafer and Recessed channels are constructed in the electrical layer. These recessed channels are arranged so as to align with some existing trenches. Then, a second source layer and a second copper blanket layer are applied to the surface of the second dielectric layer. 'To fill a plurality of channels. Click here' These channels can provide the vertical connection between the original horizontal interconnection layer and the horizontal interconnection layer applied subsequently. The electrochemical deposition of copper films has become a highly efficient production process. It is an important process step in electronic products. On the other hand, trenches and channels can be etched simultaneously in the dielectric layer in a process commonly known as "dual damascene". Then, as mentioned above, these features are treated with the barrier layer, seed source layer, and blanket / blanket layer. These thin layers will simultaneously fill multiple trenches and channels that sink to the bottom of the trench. Then the excess material is discarded as described above to generate a plurality of built-in conductors. Due to the metallic structure, the mechanical properties of copper metallization are extremely important. This is particularly significant when it comes to the effects on the mechanical properties of copper metallization during the chemical mechanical polishing process. The grain size variability of copper thin film between wafers and wafers will negatively affect the polishing rate of chemical mechanical treatment and the final surface of the polished copper structure after the polishing. The paper size applies to Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 495885 ff 6 6% of the day is positive B7 ~ nr complement without: '" Wufa Mingming () uniformity. It would be highly desirable to have large grain size and low grain size variability in the copper thin film. The electronic properties of copper metallization are also extremely important for the performance of related microelectronic devices. If copper metallization exhibits excessive and eventually results in electron removal of open-circuit or short-circuit conditions at one or more metallization features, then these devices may fail. One factor that has a significant effect on the electron removal resistance of sub-micron metal lines is the grain size of the deposited metal. The reason is that the energy of the grain boundary removal phenomenon is much lower than that of the inter grain removal. In order to achieve the desired electronic characteristics of the copper metallization, the grain structure of each deposited blanket layer is changed by an annealing process. This annealing process has traditionally been viewed as requiring a separate process step in which a semiconductor wafer is subjected to a high temperature of about 400 degrees Celsius. Currently, there are only a few available annealing devices that are generally stand-alone batch units, and are typically designed to perform batch processing of wafers placed on wafer racks. A unitary wafer annealing apparatus may be, for example, U.S. Patent No. 6,136,163, and its owner is disclosed by Cheung. The device includes a chamber body enclosing a cooling plate therein, and a heater plate located below the cooling plate. The heater plate is then enclosed and surrounded by a heater and a floating plate. The floating plate includes supporting pins that can support the wafer by the protruding frame to support the heater and the heater plate. The support pins can be moved up to move the wafer closer to the cooling plate, and down to move the wafer closer to or against the heater plate. A potential disadvantage of this device is that the chamber body is enclosed with a large volume, which is filled with gas and / or processing gas or ____ ^ ____ This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page)

· n 1 ·ϋ n ϋ en an I n n n n n n ϋ flu in ϋ ·ϋ n I n n I— I n n n n n ϋ I 495885 旅;: i ^ —人丄, Π 6 片糾.,、* A7 ,補1丨 各、★〆 v-«— * 五、發明說明() 將極爲昂貴與耗時。另一項潛在缺點是該加熱器或無法有 效率地將熱傳送給該加熱器平板。而又另一項潛在缺點是 於完成退火程序的加熱階段後,該加熱器平板或將繼續對 晶圓加熱,而或因而限制住該冷卻平板的效率。 另一種針對微影技術領域之單一性晶圓裝置可如美國 專利案號5,651,823,且其所有人爲Parodi等人所揭示者。 這種裝置包括位於個別室體內的加熱與冷卻單元,藉以加 熱和冷卻各光阻薄層。按此,該裝置或不適於及/或過度耗 時於應用在退火處理內,因爲晶圓必須要被置放在加熱室 體內’然後再按逐個退火循環移出該加熱室體而放入冷卻 室體中。此外,將晶圓從某室體移動到下一室體中的傳送 支臂,通常在接觸到該晶圓時,並不會具有與該晶圓相同 的溫度’因而在晶圓上造成溫度梯度,會不利地影響到敏 感的熱處理製程之均勻性。 [發明槪要] 本發明係針對一種應用於在高溫下處理微電子工件之 方法與裝置。一種根據於本發明某一實施例之裝置,包括 了於作業過程裡,可置放以接合並支撐該微電子工件的工 件支架。該裝置可進一步包括一熱源,其具有固體接合表 面,並經置放以接合於該微電子工件之一表面。而該熱源 可進一步包括一直接附接及/或整合於該熱源的熱產生器。 該熱源與該工件支架中至少一者,係可相對另者而移動於 該微電子工件接觸該熱源接合表面之第一位置,與該微電 _—_ _2_ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) " (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) · n n ϋ n n ϋ ·ϋ I ϋ 1 I H -1· n 1 n n n n i— n II I n 1 n n n n n n · 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(s) 子工件隔置於該接合表面之第二位置間。該熱源係經尺寸 調制,而當該微電子工件接合於該熱源時,以足夠熱處理( 即如低溫式退火程序)該微電子工件之既選材質的速率,將 熱傳送給該微電子工件。 在本發明進一步特點中,該裝置可包括一置放以接合 並支撐該微電子工件的工件支架、一經置放以至少接近於 該微電子工件之熱源,以及一排熱槽置放在最爲近於該熱 源處,以冷卻該熱源。可將該排熱槽耦接至一足以耦接到 加壓冷卻液來源處之啓動器,以移動該啓動器並冷卻該排 熱槽。另外,該排熱槽亦可爲第一排熱槽,而該裝置可進 一步含有一置放最爲近於該第一排熱槽處的第二排熱槽, 以冷卻該第一排熱槽。該第一排熱槽可相對於該熱源和該 第二排熱槽,而移動於該第一排熱槽接合於該熱源以冷卻 該熱源之第一位置,與該第一排熱槽接合於該第二排熱槽 以冷卻該第一排熱槽之第二位置間。在本實施例進一步特 點中,該熱源可爲置放於該第一排熱槽之上。 又在本發明進一步特點中,可將眾多的熱處理室體逐 一而上置放,以獨立地對複數個微電子工件進行熱處理。 這些熱處理室體可具有模組式架構,而讓某上方室體的下 層表面定義出其下方室體的上層表面。 又在本發明進一步特點中,該裝置可包括一經組態設 定以支撐微電子工件的工件支架,與置放鄰近於該微電子 工件的熱源。該熱源可具有一既經組態設定,可在某低溫 製程中,按該微電子工件某單位面積之第一速率,來傳送 8 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) r.·裝 訂il-------線‘ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A7 ------ B7 五、發明說明(b) 熱給該微電子工件的第〜區域。該熱源可進一步包含一既 經組態設定,可在低溫製程中,按該微電子工件某單位面 積之第二速率’來傳送熱給該微電子工件的第二區域,而 該每單位面積之第二速率係高於該單位面積之第一速率。 又在本發明進一步特點中,該裝置可包括至少一個第 一處理室體與至少一個第=處理室體。該第一處理室體可 經組態設定以將某材質施用於某一微電子工件、自該微電 子工件蝕刻掉某材質、潤濕該微電子工件,及/或乾燥該微 電子工件。該第二處理室體可具有一工件支架和一熱源, 而彼等工件支架和熱源至少其一可相對於另者而移動,以 將該熱源的接觸表面接合於該微電子工件。一工件傳送單 元可置放鄰近於至少其中〜個室體,俾接合與移動該微電 子工件。在一特定實施例中,該第一室體可經組態設定以 施加銅質材質於該微電子基板上,而該第二室體可經組態 設定以退火處理該銅質材質。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本發明亦指一種用以熱處理一微電子工件的方法。在 本發明之一特點中,本方法可包括將該微電子工件接合於 一熱源的固體熱傳送表面,以一直接附接及/或整合於該熱 源之熱產生器,將熱導延至該熱源內,並以足夠熱處理該 微電子工件之既選材質的速率(如在某低溫製程中),將熱 自其固體表面傳送到微電子工件。該方法可進一步包括冷 卻該微電子工件,並將該微電子工件卸離於該固體表面。 在本發明之進一步特點中,本方法更可包括藉由將某 一置放鄰近於該微電子工件某側之覆帽,接合到可支撐該 9 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 ____B7 五、發明說明(Ί ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 固體熱傳送表面並被置放鄰近於該微電子工件之反側的基 座,來至少部分地包封該微電子工件,其中該微電子工件 係放置於該覆帽與之基座間。本方法更可進一步包括藉由 對某個鄰接於該氧化作用介質之微電子工件的區域提供一 種淸除流體,俾以淸除該區域。在本發明另一特點中,本 方法可包括按照一單位面積速率來傳送熱到該微電子工件 的某區域,而該單位面積速率係與傳送至該微電子工件某 第二區域的速率不同。又在本發明另一特點中,本方法可 包括利用一電阻加熱器來加熱該固體熱傳送表面,並藉由 調整某個附接於該終端之連接器的尺寸,來移偏位於加熱 器連接終端處之導熱損失,按此來產生電阻熱。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 一種根據本發明另一特點之方法,可包括藉由提供具 有第一部份、鄰近於該第一部份的第二部份,以及位於第 一部份和第二部份間之第一腔穴的第一退火室體,而構成 眾多用以熱處理某微電子工件之室體。該第一腔穴係經組 態設定以接收單一個微電子工件。該方法可進一步包括將 某第三部份定位於鄰近該第二部分,而該些第二和第三部 份可於其間定義出經組態設定以接收另一個微電子工件的 第二腔穴。該方法可進一步包括在第~腔穴內置放一第一 熱源,而在第二腔穴內置放一第二熱源,而各個熱源係經 組態設定以按低溫製程來加熱該微電子工件。 [圖式簡單說明] 圖1Α- 1G說明各種用以將金屬沉積於構築在微電子 10 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(又) 工件表面上之微型結構內的步驟,這種金屬結構係適合於 根據本發明一實施例之熱反應器內的退火處理; 圖2A_ 2D爲根據本發明兩種實施例而建構之熱反應 器的示意方塊圖; 圖3A-3F爲厚型薄膜加熱器而可用於如圖2A- 2D 所示之熱傳送單元的進一步實施例之剖視圖; 圖3Q:gj爲構成如圖3A - 3F厚型薄膜加熱器架構之 各種元件平齒摩; β74〜? 圖:爲根據本發明實施例,一厚型薄膜加熱器 與一排熱槽在Ιί«送單元中可爲相互倂合的各種方式; 圖8說明如圖2Α- 2D所示型式之眾多熱反應器可爲 整合於某單一退火站台的一種方式; 圖9說明可用於協調熱反應器作業之可程式化控制系 統的實施例; 圖10爲根據本發明實施例而用於熱處理微電子工件之 裝置之部分示意圖; 圖11爲根據本發明實施例之熱源的分解圖; 圖12爲根據本發明另一實施例之熱源的部分立體圖; 圖13爲根據本發明另一實施例之電阻性熱源的平面圖 j 圖I4爲根據本發明另一實施例,具有眾多加熱區域之 熱源的平面圖; 圖15爲根據本發明另一實施例,具有四個電阻性加熱 元件之熱源的平面圖; 11 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 言 良 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(1 ) 圖16爲根據本發明另一實施例,電子連接器之側視圖 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 圖17爲根據本發明實施例,工件支架的部分分解圖; 圖18爲根據本發明實施例,冷源的部分分解圖; 圖19爲根據本發明實施例,用以熱處理微電子工件之 裝置部分的部分示意剖面圖; 圖20爲如圖19之裝置局部的部分立體圖; 圖21爲如圖19和20所示裝置之反向局部的俯視圖; 圖22爲根據本發明另一實施例,用以熱處理微電子工 件之裝置局部的部分示意剖面圖; 圖23爲一種含有根據本發明實施例熱處理室體的系統 之部分示意圖; 圖24爲一種含有根據本發明另一實施例熱處理室體的 系統之部分示意圖。 [元件符號說明] 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 400. 組裝 405. 區域 410. 介電材質薄層 415. 溝渠 420. 通道 423· 阻障層 425. 種源層 430. 側牆 12 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 五、發明說明(叫) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 _B7 440. 薄層 500. 熱反應器 505. 第一組裝 510. 第二組裝 515. 啓動器 520. 第一組裝承體 525. 元件 530. 低部 540. 往返延伸支臂 545. 上部 550. 第二組裝承體 555. 熱處理室體 560. 熱傳送單元 565 加熱器 569. 體積 570. 排熱槽 580. 氣體注入機埠 585. 氣體排出機璋 600. 高阻抗層 601. 介電釉面層 601a. 介電鍍層 603. 真空配送電路通道 604 高電阻性跡質 605. 陶瓷基板層 13 -------:----裝 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂——,------線 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明( v\ ) 606. 孔洞 607. 外部真空供應器 608. (可選性)真空供應器 609. 孔洞 611. 同心圓式隔離區域 612. 冷卻液注入機埠 613. 隔離區域 614. 隔離區域 617. 冷卻液排出機埠 633. 絕緣材質 700. 承體單元 710. 室體單元 715. 高部水平隔牆 720. 低部水平隔牆 725. 側牆 730. 自動門或寄送槽開口 900. 控制系統 905. 可程式化控制器 910. 自動式氣流量計/閥系統 915. 反應器溫度感測/供應系統 920. 元件驅動系統 925. 冷卻組裝系統 930. 安全關機元件 1000. 裝置 14 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 訂- -------線』 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 五、發明說明(β ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 _B7 1002. 裝置支架 1003a. 上部室體 1003b. 低部室體 1004. 縱架 1005. 接收通道 1006. 標片 1007. 啓動器 1008. 室體體積 1010. 基座 1020. 室蓋 1021. 室蓋啓動器 1022. 除淨流體流道 1023. 除淨流體機埠 1024. 除淨流體孔洞 1025. 除淨流體擴散平板 1026. 除淨流體離出開口 1027. 摺面 1028a. 連接過道 1028b. 連接過道 1028c. 連接過道 1030. 機蓋 1030 機蓋 1040. 熱源 1041. 真空孔洞 15 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(〇]) A7 _B7 1042. 加熱器真空機埠 1043. 真空過道 1044. 熱源支架 1045. 耦接機埠 1046a. 陶瓷平板 1046b. 陶瓷平板 1046c. 陶瓷平板 1047. 真空通道 1048. 校準孔穴 1049. 校準角針 1050. 第二排熱槽 1051. 冷卻組件覆帽 1054. 冷卻通道 1060. 第一排熱槽 1061. 排熱槽啓動器 1063. 真空通道 1064. 真空通道 1065. 真空機埠 1066. 熱襯墊 1067. 接合表面 1070. 工件支架 1080. 電子元件 1081. 接觸襯墊 1082. 內部電路 •丨·-------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂——.------線 ·: 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 五、發明說明(0\ ) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 _B7 1083. 外部電路 1084. 電子連接器 1085. 接觸表面 1086. 排通口 1087. 外部區域 1088. 內部區域 1138. 真空凹溝 1139. 通道機蓋 1140. 熱源 1145. 耦接機埠 1146. 陶瓷平板 1147. 真空通道 1240. 熱源 1249. 機格 1281. 室體邊牆 1282. 內部電路(1282a、 1282b) 1283. 外部電路(1283a、 1283b) 1287. 外部區域 1287a. 中央部分 1287b. 位於該中央部分 圍區域 1287a各側上的外 1287c. 鄰近於該熱源接觸襯墊的接觸區域 1287. 外部區域 1288. 內部區域 17 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 _B7_ 五、發明說明(6 ) 1288內%區域 1900. 裝置 1903. 熱處理室體 1903a.上部室體 1903b.低部室體 1910. 基座 1920. 室蓋 1921. 室蓋啓動器 1922. 淨除流體流道 1924. 淨除流體孔洞 1927. 摺面 1930. 機蓋 1940. 熱源 1944. 熱源支架 1950. 第二排熱槽部分 1954. 冷卻通道 1955. 開口 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 1956. 〇型環部分 1957a.冷卻通道進入機璋 1957b.冷卻通道離出機璋1957b 1958. 冷卻供應線路 1959. 冷卻離出線路 1960. 第一排熱槽部分 1961. 排熱槽啓動器 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 弓說明( ) 1962. 真空供應流道 1963. 真空通道 1964. 真空通道 1966. 啓動器供應流道 1978. 淨空凹洞 1990. 排熱槽 2003. 熱處理室體 2200. 裝置 2203a. 上部室體 2203b. 低部室體 2210. 基座 2220. 室蓋 2221. 室蓋啓動器 2222. 淨除流體流道 2224. 淨除流體孔洞 2227. 摺面 2230. 機蓋 2250. 輔助性排熱槽 2260. 排熱槽 2261. 排熱槽啓動器 2264. 可擴充體積 2266. 啓動器供應過道 2300. 系統2300 2310a. 浸濕/乾燥站台室體 19 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(A ) 2310b. 電鍍站台或室體 2312. 輸入/輸出區域 2315. 熱處理室體 2320. 傳送機制 2325. 中央軌線 2400. 系統 2440. 專屬機械機制 2445. 中介階段閘門/區域 I----------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) [發明之詳細說明] 爲說明本發明,,微電子工件係經定義爲包括一由基板 所構成之工件,其上載置或得構建有微電子電路或諸元、 資料儲存元件或薄層,及/或微機械元件。雖然本發明可用 於廣泛的產品範圍,不過本發明係特以有關在積體電路生 產過程中,構築於半導體晶圓上之連接結構產製應用而說 明。而更進一步,雖然本發明可應用相關於廣泛範圍的金 屬與金屬合金,以及相關於廣泛範圍的高溫製程,不過本 發明特以關於電子化學沉積銅質與銅質合金之退火程序而 說明。 '一種根據本發明實施例之裝置,包括一既經組態設定 以對施加之銅質薄膜依低溫進行退火的快速熱退火室體。 即如本文所用,該名詞低溫是指溫度低於彼等將劣化或損 毀微電子工件內介電材質的溫度。例如在一實施例中,該 快速熱退火室體可於約攝氏450度或更低的溫度來執行。 20 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 訂: -丨線) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A7 ______ B7 五、發明說明(π) 在另一實施例中,該室體可對其他材質退火,·及/或執行其 他低溫功能,像是重導焊劑及/或烘烤光阻層。而在另一實 施例中,該室體可經組態設定以對金屬結構按其他溫度來 退火(或執行其他功能)。 在金屬薄層或結構可在對應於本發明一實施例之熱反 應器內進行退火前,首先會將該金屬薄層或結構沉置於微 電子工件的表面上。可藉由電子化學式沉積技術(如無電式 沉積或電解沉積作業)、真空技術(如物理氣相沉積(PVD)或 化學氣相沉積(CVD)),或者是其他技術來沉積該金屬。圖 1Α- 1G說明一種對構成於微電子工件表面上之溝渠與通 道進行塡充的方法。圖1Α說明一個具有經銅質金屬化所 連接之區域405的組裝400。圖1Β中說明一介電材質薄層 410,可像是二氧化矽或低-Κ性介電材質,經沉置於包含 在區域405處的第二組裝400之上。透過光阻程序與反應 性離子鈾刻等等,該薄層410的選擇性部分會被移除,以 構成例如像是一溝渠415與通道420,而其內則是待加沉 積出銅質金屬化。圖1C中顯示最終結構的外觀圖,其中 通道420疊置於連接區域405,而溝渠415則疊置於通道 420。該連接區域405可爲像是基板上的金屬化特徵處。 即如圖1D所示,阻障層423與種源層425可被沉積 於該介電層410的表面上。該阻障層423可爲例如鉬質或 氮化鈦質。當結構405易受銅質或該種源層金屬的污染所 影響,即/或當該種源層金屬或銅質確屬備妥而移灕透過該 介電層410並污染該微電子電路的其他部分時,一般就會 21 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項却填寫本頁) !·★ -丨線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(ν' ) 採用該阻障層423。按此,該阻障層423自應沿諸溝渠與 通道表形而爲足夠屏厚,俾具阻斷擴散之功用。該阻障層 423亦可作爲一黏附層以利該種源層425與該介電層410 之間的接結效果。然而,假使該結構405並無虞受到這種 污染,又有足夠接合力,則該介電層410本身即適於作爲 一阻障層,從而該個別的阻障層423非屬必要者。該種源 層425可爲例如一銅質層或其他的導體金屬層,並且厚度 在其最細薄處最好是至少爲2000埃。溝渠415和通道420 的側牆430,以及通道420的底部,皆應以該種源層425 和阻障層423所覆蓋,俾利後續的電子化學式銅質沉積步 驟。可藉例如CVD或PVD製程來沉積出該種源層425。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 具種源層425的微電子工件可待受後續電子化學性銅 質沉積製程處理。可執行該項電子化學性銅質沉積程序, 以構成各種銅質沉積的凝核位置’俾築建出大致會小於通 道420和溝渠415特徵尺寸的晶粒大小。一種具有這種特 徵的示範性結構可如圖1Ε所示,其中該薄層440係利用 電子化學性銅質沉積製程所沉積出的銅質金屬化。而在該 程序的另一特點中,諸晶粒之導向亦可爲讓該[Π1]結晶平 面方向係垂直朝向於所曝出之銅質層的平面,即如既已出 版之PCT申請案WO 99/40615號所揭示者,茲按其整體倂 入爲本參考文獻。 如圖1Ε所示,按電子化學性銅質沉積製程所構成的 銅質金屬化440會沉積在該種源層425之上,並在介電層 410的表面上延展出某段距離。由於需涵括金屬化的特徵 22 ^紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 χ 297公爱)' 49^^5--- 修正 ff 年“]/V:; A7 /l\[__B7 _ 五、發明說明() 處僅爲通道420和溝渠415,故高於該介電層410而過多 的銅質必須被予以移除。可藉由執行化學機械式拋光技術 來移除掉高於該介電層410上的過多銅質。一種可進行這 項移除作業的示範性結構可如圖1F所示。在移除之後,可 續於例如像是整個晶圓表面上沉積出一覆帽阻障層445, 或無須該覆帽阻障層445而重複進行圖1A- 1F內所列述 之各項製程,讓現已充滿銅質金屬化的溝渠415可對應於 結構405,在此會接觸到更多的銅質金屬化。 如圖1A- 1G所述之製程可標指出該些通道420和溝 渠415係倂同構成者。然而,應得知悉該些結構通常可根 據前文所述之單一鑲嵌製程,而按個別方式予以構成與塡 充。在這種情況下,首先是依據圖1A- 1F所述步驟覆鍍 出通道420,然後於完成鍍製該通道420後,再依據圖1A -1F所述步驟覆鍍出該溝渠415。實際上,在鍍製該溝渠 415的過程中,通道420會對應於結構405。本揭之熱處理 器和相關方法適合應用於單鑲嵌與多顆紋製程兩者。 ’圖1E與1F的比較結果可顯示該銅質金屬化440的晶 粒大小確已出現增加。這項晶粒大小的變化可根據本發明 實施例,藉由讓該微電子工件在如下述之熱反應器中接受 退火程序處理而依意加速。在該項退火程序裡,晶圓會被 提昇到高過通常呈現於潔淨內室裡之周圍溫度條件的高溫 。該退火程序可於攝氏250 - 300度或略低,或者是至少會 相較於該介電層所採用的材質開始出現劣化之溫度爲低的 溫度下進行。當該介電層是由低K型介電材質所構成時, ____._ 7^____ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) %·· N 1 · ϋ n ϋ en an I nnnnnn ϋ flu in ϋ · ϋ n I nn I— I nnnnn ϋ I 495885 brigade :: i ^ — person, Π 6 pieces of correction., * A7, supplement 1 each , ★ 〆v-«— * 5. Invention Description () will be extremely expensive and time-consuming. Another potential disadvantage is that the heater may not be able to efficiently transfer heat to the heater plate. Yet another potential disadvantage is that after completion of the heating phase of the annealing process, the heater plate may continue to heat the wafer, or thus limit the efficiency of the cooling plate. Another unitary wafer device for the field of lithography can be found in U.S. Patent No. 5,651,823, and its owner is disclosed by Parodi et al. This device includes heating and cooling units located in individual chambers to heat and cool the thin photoresist layers. According to this, the device may not be suitable and / or excessively time-consuming for application in the annealing process, because the wafer must be placed in the heating chamber ', and then the heating chamber is removed from the annealing chamber one by one and placed in the cooling chamber Body. In addition, the transfer arm that moves the wafer from one chamber to the next, usually does not have the same temperature as the wafer when it contacts the wafer, thus causing a temperature gradient on the wafer. , Will adversely affect the uniformity of sensitive heat treatment process. [Inventive summary] The present invention is directed to a method and apparatus for processing microelectronic workpieces at high temperatures. An apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention includes a work piece holder that can be placed to engage and support the microelectronic work piece during operation. The device may further include a heat source having a solid bonding surface and placed to bond to a surface of the microelectronic workpiece. The heat source may further include a heat generator directly attached and / or integrated with the heat source. At least one of the heat source and the workpiece holder can be moved relative to the other at a first position where the microelectronic workpiece contacts the heat source joint surface, and the microelectronics ___ _2_ This paper size applies to Chinese national standards (CNS ) A4 size (210 x 297 mm) " (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) · nn ϋ nn ϋ · ϋ I ϋ 1 IH -1 · n 1 nnnni— n II I n 1 nnnnnn · 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (s) The sub-workpiece is placed between the second positions of the joint surface. The heat source is dimensioned, and when the microelectronic workpiece is joined to the heat source, heat is transferred to the microelectronic workpiece at a rate sufficient to heat treat (i.e., a low temperature annealing procedure) the selected material of the microelectronic workpiece. In a further feature of the invention, the device may include a workpiece holder placed to engage and support the microelectronic workpiece, a heat source placed at least close to the microelectronic workpiece, and a row of heat sinks placed nearest At the heat source to cool the heat source. The heat sink can be coupled to an initiator sufficient to couple to the source of pressurized coolant to move the initiator and cool the heat sink. In addition, the heat removal tank may also be a first heat extraction tank, and the device may further include a second heat extraction tank placed closest to the first heat extraction tank to cool the first heat extraction tank. The first row of heat sinks may be moved relative to the heat source and the second row of heat sinks at a first position where the first row of heat sinks is joined to the heat source to cool the heat source, and is joined to the first row of heat sinks at The second heat sink is used to cool the second position of the first heat sink. In a further feature of this embodiment, the heat source may be placed on the first row of heat sinks. In a further feature of the present invention, a plurality of heat treatment chamber bodies can be placed one by one to heat-treat a plurality of microelectronic workpieces independently. These heat treatment chambers may have a modular structure, and the lower surface of an upper chamber defines the upper surface of the lower chamber. In a further feature of the present invention, the device may include a workpiece holder configured to support a microelectronic workpiece, and a heat source for placing the microelectronic workpiece adjacent to the workpiece holder. The heat source can have a configuration that can be transmitted at a first rate per unit area of the microelectronic workpiece in a low temperature process. 8 paper sizes are applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297). Mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) r. · Binding il ------- line 'Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumer Cooperatives 495885 A7 ------ B7 5 2. Description of the Invention (b) Heat is applied to the first ~ area of the microelectronic workpiece. The heat source may further include a configuration configured to transmit heat to a second area of the microelectronic workpiece at a second rate of a unit area of the microelectronic workpiece in a low temperature process, and the The second rate is higher than the first rate per unit area. In a further feature of the present invention, the device may include at least one first processing chamber body and at least one first processing chamber body. The first processing chamber body may be configured to apply a material to a microelectronic workpiece, etch a material from the microelectronic workpiece, wet the microelectronic workpiece, and / or dry the microelectronic workpiece. The second processing chamber body may have a workpiece support and a heat source, and at least one of the workpiece support and the heat source may be moved relative to the other to join the contact surface of the heat source to the microelectronic workpiece. A workpiece transfer unit can be placed adjacent to at least one of the chambers, and the microelectronic workpiece can be engaged and moved. In a specific embodiment, the first chamber body can be configured to apply a copper material to the microelectronic substrate, and the second chamber body can be configured to anneal the copper material. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economics The present invention also refers to a method for heat treating a microelectronic workpiece. In a feature of the invention, the method may include bonding the microelectronic workpiece to a solid heat transfer surface of a heat source, and extending heat to the heat source with a heat generator directly attached and / or integrated with the heat source. And at a rate sufficient to heat treat the selected material of the microelectronic workpiece (such as in a low temperature process), transfer heat from its solid surface to the microelectronic workpiece. The method may further include cooling the microelectronic workpiece and removing the microelectronic workpiece from the solid surface. In a further feature of the present invention, the method may further include joining a cap that is placed adjacent to one side of the microelectronic workpiece to support the 9 paper standards that are compatible with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (21〇X 297 mm) 495885 A7 ____B7 V. Description of the invention (Ί) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The solid heat transfer surface is placed near the substrate on the opposite side of the microelectronic workpiece A base to at least partially enclose the microelectronic workpiece, wherein the microelectronic workpiece is placed between the cap and its base. The method may further include providing an erasing fluid to an area of the microelectronic workpiece adjacent to the oxidation medium to erase the area. In another feature of the invention, the method may include transferring heat to a certain area of the microelectronic workpiece at a unit area rate, and the unit area rate is different from the rate of transferring to a second area of the microelectronic workpiece. In yet another feature of the invention, the method may include using a resistance heater to heat the solid heat transfer surface and shifting the heater connection by adjusting the size of a connector attached to the terminal. Due to the loss of thermal conductivity at the terminals, resistance heat is generated. The Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs prints a method according to another feature of the present invention, which may include providing a second part having a first part, adjacent to the first part, and located in the first part The first annealing chamber body of the first cavity between the second part and the second part constitutes a plurality of chamber bodies for heat treating a microelectronic workpiece. The first cavity is configured to receive a single microelectronic workpiece. The method may further include positioning a third portion adjacent to the second portion, and the second and third portions may define a second cavity therebetween configured to receive another microelectronic workpiece. . The method may further include placing a first heat source in the first cavity and a second heat source in the second cavity, and each heat source is configured to heat the microelectronic workpiece according to a low-temperature process. [Brief description of the drawings] Figures 1A-1G illustrate various methods for depositing metals on microelectronics. 10 Paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 B7. 5. Description of the invention ( Also) The steps in the microstructure on the surface of the workpiece, this metal structure is suitable for the annealing treatment in a thermal reactor according to an embodiment of the present invention; Figures 2A-2D are thermal reactions constructed according to two embodiments of the present invention A schematic block diagram of the device; Figures 3A-3F are cross-sectional views of further embodiments of thick film heaters that can be used for the heat transfer unit shown in Figures 2A-2D; Figure 3Q: gj is a thick type of Figure 3A-3F Various elements of the thin film heater architecture are flat-toothed; β74 ~? Figure: According to the embodiment of the present invention, a thick film heater and a row of heat sinks can be combined with each other in the sending unit; Figure 8 illustrates that many thermal reactors of the type shown in Figures 2A-2D can be integrated into a single annealing station; Figure 9 illustrates an embodiment of a programmable control system that can be used to coordinate the operation of a thermal reactor; Figure 10 is According to this Fig. 11 is an exploded view of a heat source according to an embodiment of the present invention; Fig. 12 is a partial perspective view of a heat source according to another embodiment of the present invention; Plan view of a resistive heat source according to another embodiment of the invention. Figure I4 is a plan view of a heat source having a plurality of heating areas according to another embodiment of the invention. Plan of the heat source; 11 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Yan Liang, Intellectual Property Bureau, Ministry of Economic Affairs, Employee Consumption Cooperative, printed on paper This paper applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (1) Figure 16 is a side view of an electronic connector according to another embodiment of the present invention (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Figure 17 is a workpiece according to an embodiment of the present invention Partial exploded view of the bracket; FIG. 18 is a partial exploded view of a cold source according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 19 is a heat treatment micro-electric unit according to an embodiment of the present invention Fig. 20 is a partial perspective view of a part of the device shown in Fig. 19; Fig. 21 is a plan view of a reversed part of the device shown in Figs. 19 and 20; and Fig. 22 is another view of the device according to the present invention. Example, a schematic partial cross-sectional view of a part of a device for heat treating microelectronic workpieces; FIG. 23 is a partial schematic view of a system including a heat treatment chamber body according to an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 24 is a view containing a heat treatment according to another embodiment of the present invention Part of the chamber system. [Description of component symbols] Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 400. Assembly 405. Area 410. Thin layer of dielectric material 415. Channel 420. Channel 423. Barrier layer 425. Source layer 430. Side wall 12 books Paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 495885 V. Description of invention (called) Printed by A7 _B7 440. Thin layer 500. Thermal reactor 505. One assembly 510. Second assembly 515. Starter 520. First assembly carrier 525. Element 530. Lower part 540. Reciprocating extension arm 545. Upper part 550. Second assembly carrier 555. Heat treatment chamber body 560. Heat transfer Unit 565 Heater 569. Volume 570. Exhaust tank 580. Gas injection machine port 585. Gas exhaust machine 600. High impedance layer 601. Dielectric glaze layer 601a. Dielectric plating layer 603. Vacuum distribution circuit channel 604 High resistance Characteristic 605. Ceramic substrate layer 13 -------: -------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page). China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs V. Description of invention (v \) 606. Hole 607. External vacuum supply 608. (Optional) Vacuum supply 609. Hole 611. Concentric circular isolation area 612. Coolant injection machine port 613. Isolation area 614. Isolation area 617. Coolant discharge machine port 633. Insulation material 700. Bearing unit 710. Room unit 715. High level horizontal partition wall 720. Lower horizontal partition wall 725. Side wall 730. Automatic door or delivery slot opening 900. Control system 905. Programmable controller 910. Automatic gas flow meter / valve system 915. Reactor temperature sensing / supply system 920 Component drive system 925. Cooling assembly system 930. Safety shutdown component 1000. Device 14 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Binding-------- Thread This paper size applies to Chinese national standards ( CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 495885 V. Description of the invention (β) Printed by A7 _B7 1002. Device bracket 1003a. Upper chamber 1003b. Lower chamber 1004. Vertical frame 1005. Receiving channel 1006. Tab 1007. Starter 1008. Room volume 1010. Base 1020. Room cover 1021. Room cover starter 1022. Clean fluid channel 1023. Clean fluid port 1024 Clean fluid holes 1025. Clean fluid diffusion plate 1026. Clean fluid exit opening 1027. Folding surface 1028a. Connection aisle 1028b. Connection aisle 1028c. Connection aisle 1030. Cover 1030 Cover 1040. Heat source 1041 . Vacuum hole 15 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 495885 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Explanation (〇)) A7 _B7 1042. Heater vacuum machine port 1043. Vacuum aisle 1044. Heat source support 1045. Coupling machine port 1046a. Ceramic plate 1046b. Ceramic plate 1046c. Ceramic plate 1047. Vacuum channel 1048. Calibration hole 1049 Calibration angle pin 1050. Second row of heat sinks 1051. Cooling assembly cover 1054. Cooling channel 1060. First row of heat sinks 1061. Heat sink starter 1063. Vacuum channel 1064. Empty channel 1065. Vacuum machine port 1066. Thermal pad 1067. Joining surface 1070. Workpiece support 1080. Electronic component 1081. Contact pad 1082. Internal circuit • 丨 -------------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order ——.------ Line ·: This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 495885 5. Description of the invention (0 \) Printed by A7 _B7 1083. External circuit 1084. Electronic connector 1085. Contact surface 1086. Exhaust port 1087. External area 1088. Internal area 1138. Vacuum groove 1139. Channel Cover 1140. Heat source 1145. Coupling port 1146. Ceramic plate 1147. Vacuum channel 1240. Heat source 1249. Cell 1281. Room side wall 1282. Internal circuit (1282a, 1282b) 1283. External circuit (1283a, 1283b) 1287. Outer area 1287a. Central portion 1287b. Outer 1287c on each side of the central area surrounding area 1287a. Contact area adjacent to the heat source contact pad 1287. Outer area 1288. Inner area 17 Paper Standards apply to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 _B7_ V. Description of the invention (6) 1288% area 1900. Device 1903. Heat treatment chamber body 1903a. Upper chamber body 1903b. Lower chamber body 1910 Base 1920. Room cover 1921. Room cover starter 1922. Fluid removal channel 1924. Fluid removal hole 1927. Folding surface 1930. Cover 1940. Heat source 1944. Heat source bracket 1950. Second row of heat sink section 1954 Cooling channel 1955. Opened by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Printed 1956. 〇-ring part 1957a. Cooling channel entering machine 1957b. Cooling channel leaving machine 1957b 1958. Cooling supply line 1959. Cooling line 1960 The first row of heat sinks 1961. The heat sink starter This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumers ’Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs () 1962. Vacuum supply channel 1963. Vacuum channel 1964. Vacuum channel 1966. Starter supply channel 1978. Clearance cavity 1990. Exhaust tank 2003. Heat treatment chamber body 2200. Device 2203a. Upper chamber Body 2203b. Lower part of the body 2210. Base 2220. Cover 2221. Cover starter 2222. Clean fluid passage 2224. Clean fluid holes 2227. Fold surface 2230. Cover 2250. Auxiliary heat sink 2260. Exhaust heat sink 2261. Exhaust heat sink starter 2264. Expandable volume 2266. Starter supply aisle 2300. System 2300 2310a. Wetting / drying station chamber 19 This paper is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (A) 2310b. Electroplating platform or chamber body 2312. Input / output area 2315. Heat treatment chamber body 2320. Transmission mechanism 2325. Central rail 2400. System 2440. Exclusive mechanical mechanism 2445. Intermediate stage gate / area I ---------- install --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) [Detailed description of the invention] To illustrate the present invention, microelectronic workpieces It is defined as including a workpiece composed of a substrate on which microelectronic circuits or elements, data storage elements or thin layers, and / or micromechanical elements are placed or constructed. Although the present invention can be applied to a wide range of products, the present invention is specifically described in connection with the production and application of connection structures built on semiconductor wafers during the production of integrated circuits. Furthermore, although the present invention can be applied to a wide range of metal and metal alloys, as well as a wide range of high temperature processes, the present invention is specifically described in terms of an annealing process for electroless deposition of copper and copper alloys. 'A device according to an embodiment of the present invention includes a rapid thermal annealing chamber configured and configured to anneal an applied copper film at a low temperature. That is, as used herein, the term low temperature means that the temperature is lower than the temperature at which they will degrade or damage the dielectric material in the microelectronic workpiece. For example, in one embodiment, the rapid thermal annealing chamber can be performed at a temperature of about 450 degrees Celsius or lower. 20 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) Order:-丨 line) Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 A7 ______ B7 V. Description of invention (π) In another In an embodiment, the chamber body may anneal other materials, and / or perform other low-temperature functions, such as redirecting flux and / or baking a photoresist layer. In another embodiment, the chamber body can be configured to anneal (or perform other functions) the metal structure at other temperatures. Before the thin metal layer or structure can be annealed in a thermal reactor corresponding to an embodiment of the present invention, the thin metal layer or structure is first sunk on the surface of a microelectronic workpiece. The metal can be deposited by electronic chemical deposition techniques (such as electroless or electrolytic deposition operations), vacuum techniques (such as physical vapor deposition (PVD) or chemical vapor deposition (CVD)), or other techniques. Figures 1A-1G illustrate a method of filling channels and channels formed on the surface of a microelectronic workpiece. FIG. 1A illustrates an assembly 400 having regions 405 connected by copper metallization. FIG. 1B illustrates a thin layer 410 of a dielectric material, which may be a silicon dioxide or a low-K dielectric material, and is sunk on a second assembly 400 contained at a region 405. Through the photoresist process and reactive ion uranium etching, etc., the selective part of the thin layer 410 is removed to form, for example, a trench 415 and a channel 420, and a copper metal is to be deposited in it. Into. The appearance of the final structure is shown in FIG. 1C, where the channel 420 is stacked on the connection area 405 and the trench 415 is stacked on the channel 420. The connection region 405 may be a metallized feature on the substrate. That is, as shown in FIG. 1D, a barrier layer 423 and a seed source layer 425 can be deposited on the surface of the dielectric layer 410. The barrier layer 423 may be, for example, molybdenum or titanium nitride. When the structure 405 is susceptible to contamination by copper or the source layer metal, that is, when the source layer metal or copper is indeed prepared, it passes through the dielectric layer 410 and contaminates the microelectronic circuit. For other parts, 21 paper sizes are generally applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) (please read the precautions on the back first and fill out this page)! · ★-丨 Line · Ministry of Economy Wisdom Printed by the Consumer Affairs Cooperative of the Property Bureau 495885 Α7 Β7 V. Description of Invention (ν ') The barrier layer 423 is used. According to this, the barrier layer 423 should be formed along the trenches and channels to have a sufficient screen thickness, and has the function of blocking diffusion. The barrier layer 423 can also be used as an adhesion layer to facilitate the connection effect between the source layer 425 and the dielectric layer 410. However, if the structure 405 is free from such contamination and has sufficient bonding force, the dielectric layer 410 itself is suitable as a barrier layer, so that the individual barrier layer 423 is not necessary. The seed source layer 425 may be, for example, a copper layer or another conductive metal layer, and preferably has a thickness of at least 2000 angstroms at its thinnest portion. The trench 415 and the side wall 430 of the channel 420, and the bottom of the channel 420, should be covered with the source layer 425 and the barrier layer 423 to facilitate subsequent electronic chemical copper deposition steps. The source layer 425 can be deposited by, for example, a CVD or PVD process. The microelectronic workpiece with seed layer 425 printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs can be processed by the subsequent electrochemical copper deposition process. This electronic chemical copper deposition process can be performed to form the nuclei positions of various copper deposits', and build a grain size that is substantially smaller than the characteristic size of the channel 420 and the trench 415. An exemplary structure having such characteristics can be shown in FIG. 1E, wherein the thin layer 440 is a copper metallization deposited by an electrochemical copper deposition process. In another feature of the procedure, the orientation of the grains can also be such that the [Π1] crystal plane direction is perpendicular to the plane of the exposed copper layer, that is, as already published PCT application WO The disclosure of 99/40615 is hereby incorporated by reference as a whole. As shown in FIG. 1E, a copper metallization 440 formed by an electrochemical copper deposition process is deposited on the source layer 425, and a distance is extended on the surface of the dielectric layer 410. Due to the need to include the characteristics of metallization 22 ^ Paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 χ 297 public love) '49 ^^ 5 --- Amend ff year "] / V :; A7 / l \ [ __B7 _ 5. The description of the invention () is only the channel 420 and the trench 415, so excess copper above the dielectric layer 410 must be removed. Chemical mechanical polishing technology can be used to remove the high Excess copper on the dielectric layer 410. An exemplary structure that can perform this removal operation can be shown in Figure 1F. After removal, it can be continued, for example, by depositing a layer on the entire wafer surface. The capping barrier layer 445, or the processes listed in FIGS. 1A-1F are repeated without the capping barrier layer 445, so that the trench 415, which is now filled with copper metallization, can correspond to the structure 405. This will come into contact with more copper metallization. The process shown in Figures 1A-1G may indicate that the channels 420 and the trenches 415 are different components. However, it should be understood that these structures can usually be based on The single mosaic process described above is constituted and enriched individually. In this case, the first is based on the figure 1A-1F, the channel 420 is plated, and then the channel 420 is plated, and then the channel 415 is plated according to the steps described in FIGS. 1A-1F. In fact, during the process of plating the channel 415 The channel 420 will correspond to the structure 405. The thermal processor and related methods of this disclosure are suitable for both single damascene and multiple grain processes. 'The comparison of Figures 1E and 1F can show the grain size of the copper metallization 440 An increase has indeed occurred. This change in grain size can be accelerated according to an embodiment of the present invention by subjecting the microelectronic workpiece to an annealing process in a thermal reactor as described below. In this annealing process, The wafer will be elevated to a temperature higher than the ambient temperature conditions normally found in a clean inner chamber. This annealing process can be at 250-300 degrees Celsius or slightly lower, or at least compared to the dielectric layer The temperature at which the material begins to deteriorate is low. When the dielectric layer is made of a low-K type dielectric material, ____._ 7 ^ ____ This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) (Please read first Note the surface to fill out this page)% *

一-OJ· n m n ·ϋ ϋ n ϋ 1 I ·_ϋ n n n n n ϋ 1_1 -I ϋ n i_n ϋ -ϋ n n n n n I 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(τ ) έ這些溫度下進行退火會特別有利,因爲這種材質在超過 攝氏300度高溫時即或將開始劣化之故。 在進行化學機械式平面化(CMP)處理之前,先進行退 火會特別有利。該CMP涉及到使用機械和化學作用力,以 移除掉對於各連接處而言(參見圖1Ε和1F)確爲沉積過量 的銅質(或他種材質)。根據本發明之實施例,既經加速之 退火程序可藉由顯著地降低所需用以進行薄膜再結晶作業( 即將許多微小晶粒轉換成爲少數的大型晶粒)的時間量,來 穩定銅質薄膜的晶粒結構。根據本發明,這項加速退火程 序亦可減少晶粒大小分佈的變異性,而這會出現在室溫下 的自退火程序中。該CMP拋光速率,或移除速率,確已被 觀察到係按銅質薄膜晶粒大小的直接結果而變動。初期而 微小的晶粒薄膜(即具諸晶粒邊界)確已被觀察到,比起大 型的晶粒薄膜而言會較慢拋光(至少對某些特定的CMP漿 材)。同樣地,CMP拋^的均勻性亦確已被觀察到係按銅 質薄膜晶粒大小均勻性的直接結果而變動。因此,根據本 發明實施例,這項加速退火程序亦可減少用於CMP程序所 需的時間,而同時得改善其均勻性、可預測性和重複性。 圖2A與2B說明一種熱反應器,槪繪爲500者,係根 據本發明之一實施例所建構。該熱反應器500可包括一第 一組裝505、一第二組裝510以及某一或複數個既連以提 供於該第一組裝505與該第二組裝510間之相對運動的啓 動器515。該圖中所示之熱反應器500組態構成方式可佔 用相比於某些傳統配置爲較少的空間,這點可改善反應器 24 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 訂---,------線; 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A7 五、發明說明(vV ) 的靈活度。 在一列述之實施例中,該第二組裝51〇可包括某一或 複數個既經調適以接收來自於某自動式工件傳送機制之單 —工件W的元件525,該機制可爲像是具有得握取與釋放 該工件W之末端夾制器的機械臂。對此,該第二組裝510 可包括一第二組裝承體550,具有上部邊緣並且某一或複 數個工件支架組件525可由此延展。該工件支架組件525 可採取多種形式。例如,可構成某單一工件支架組件525 以作爲連繪性且具有唇部等等的環型物,而該工件W可被 該工件傳送機制傳置於該部之上。或另者,可依離散性指 部的型式構成出眾多的工件支架組件525,配佈在對應於 該工件W周圍邊緣的各種角位處,這些角位係經選取以確 保該工件傳送機制足得接取。其他的工件支架組態方式可 按此而適於應用。 , 該弟一組裝510可具有一內部區域,其中配佈有一熱 傳送單元560。該熱傳送單元560又再可包括一加熱器565 和一排熱槽570,彼等的運作方式可如後文中所設定。在 本實施例的某些特點裡,該加熱器565最好是具有一相對 爲低溫的熱質量,使得其溫度回應時間會位於某合理定義 的時段內’對於熱處理該工件W確爲足夠地快。在本實施 例的進一步特點裡,該排熱槽570最好是具有相較於該加 熱器565而相對爲高的熱質量,使得該排熱槽570能夠在 合理定義的時段內,冷卻該加熱器565 (即如後文中所設定 )。又在本實施例的進一步特點裡,該排熱槽570的熱容量 25 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) --------訂---,------ *5^ . 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明) 可大於該加熱器565與該工件W兩者熱容量的總和。該排 熱槽570亦可包括一種高度的熱導材質,即如銅質者。即 如在此所用,該名詞熱質量是指材質密度與特定熱的乘積 ,而該名詞熱容量則是指熱質量與材質體積的乘積。 即如前述,該啓動器510可提供第一組裝505與第二 組裝510間的相對運動。在所述之組態裡,該啓動器510 係連接以移動該第一組裝505往返而接合於該第二組裝 510。更詳細地說,該啓動器510可包括一低部530,經固 定位置齊準於該第二組裝510,因爲兩者倶已定置於一共 同層板上。往返延伸支臂540可延展自啓動器515的上部 545,而接合於該第一組裝505。該啓動器515可經組態設 定俾驅動該往返延伸支臂540與第一組裝505,得以移動 於可利用自動工件傳送機制(未以圖示)將工件W載入該第 二組裝510之第一位置,,與該第一組裝505和該第二組裝 510經置放而彼此鄰接俾構成一得供處理該工件W的空間 或室體之第二位置間。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 實際作業裡,該啓動器515會最初將該第一組裝505 驅動到該第一位置,即如圖2A所示。到此位置之後,可 利用自動工件傳送機制將該工件W放置在該第二組裝510 的工件支架組件525上,像是具有持荷該工件W之末端夾 制器的人造機械臂。 一旦該工件W已被載置於該工件支架組件525上,該 啓動器515可驅動該第一組裝505朝向該第二組裝510而 到第二位置處,即如圖2B所示。該工件支架組件525會 26 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)I-OJ · nmn · ϋ ϋ n ϋ 1 I · _ϋ nnnnn ϋ 1_1 -I ϋ n i_n ϋ -ϋ nnnnn I 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (τ) It is particularly advantageous to perform annealing at these temperatures, because this kind of When the temperature exceeds 300 degrees Celsius, the material will deteriorate. It is particularly advantageous to perform annealing before performing chemical mechanical planarization (CMP). This CMP involves the use of mechanical and chemical forces to remove copper (or other materials) that are indeed excessive deposits for each joint (see Figures 1E and 1F). According to an embodiment of the present invention, the accelerated annealing process can stabilize copper by significantly reducing the amount of time required to perform thin film recrystallization operations (i.e., transforming many tiny grains into a few large grains) The grain structure of the film. According to the present invention, this accelerated annealing procedure can also reduce the variability of the grain size distribution, which would occur in a self-annealing procedure at room temperature. The CMP polishing rate, or removal rate, has indeed been observed to vary as a direct result of the grain size of the copper film. Initially, small grain films (ie, with grain boundaries) have indeed been observed to polish more slowly than large grain films (at least for some specific CMP slurries). Similarly, the uniformity of CMP polishing has indeed been observed to vary as a direct result of the uniformity of the grain size of the copper thin film. Therefore, according to the embodiment of the present invention, this accelerated annealing process can also reduce the time required for the CMP process, while at the same time improving its uniformity, predictability and repeatability. Figures 2A and 2B illustrate a thermal reactor, shown as 500, constructed according to an embodiment of the present invention. The thermal reactor 500 may include a first assembly 505, a second assembly 510, and one or more starters 515 both connected to provide relative movement between the first assembly 505 and the second assembly 510. The configuration and configuration of the thermal reactor 500 shown in the figure can occupy less space than some traditional configurations, which can improve the reactor. 24 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Binding ---, ------- line; printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 A7 V. Description of Invention (vV) Flexibility. In a listed embodiment, the second assembly 5110 may include one or more components 525 that have been adapted to receive a single-workpiece W from an automatic workpiece transfer mechanism, which may be like having It is necessary to grasp and release the robot arm of the end clamp of the workpiece W. In this regard, the second assembly 510 may include a second assembly carrier 550 having an upper edge and one or more workpiece holder assemblies 525 may be extended therefrom. The workpiece support assembly 525 can take a variety of forms. For example, a single workpiece support assembly 525 may be constituted as a ring-shaped object having continuous drawing characteristics and having a lip or the like, and the workpiece W may be transferred on the part by the workpiece transfer mechanism. Alternatively, a plurality of workpiece holder assemblies 525 can be formed according to the type of discrete fingers, and are arranged at various angular positions corresponding to the peripheral edge of the workpiece W. These angular positions are selected to ensure that the workpiece conveying mechanism is sufficient. Got to pick it up. Other workpiece holder configuration methods can be adapted to the application. The assembly 510 may have an internal area, and a heat transfer unit 560 is provided therein. The heat transfer unit 560 may further include a heater 565 and a row of heat sinks 570, and their operation modes may be set as described later. In some features of this embodiment, the heater 565 preferably has a relatively low-temperature thermal mass, so that its temperature response time will be within a reasonably defined period of time. 'It is indeed fast enough to heat treat the workpiece W. . In a further feature of this embodiment, the heat removal tank 570 preferably has a relatively high thermal mass compared to the heater 565, so that the heat removal tank 570 can cool the heating in a reasonably defined period of time. 565 (as set later). In a further feature of this embodiment, the heat capacity of the heat sink 570 is 25 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -------- Order ---, ------ * 5 ^. Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. The paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention) May be larger than the heater 565 and the workpiece The sum of the heat capacities of both. The heat removal tank 570 may also include a highly thermally conductive material, such as copper. That is, as used herein, the term thermal mass refers to the product of material density and specific heat, and the term thermal capacity refers to the product of thermal mass and material volume. That is, as mentioned above, the actuator 510 can provide relative movement between the first assembly 505 and the second assembly 510. In the described configuration, the initiator 510 is connected to move the first assembly 505 back and forth to engage the second assembly 510. In more detail, the starter 510 may include a lower portion 530, which is aligned with the second assembly 510 through a fixed position, because the two are already positioned on a common layer board. The reciprocating extension arm 540 can extend from the upper portion 545 of the starter 515 to be engaged with the first assembly 505. The starter 515 can be configured to drive the reciprocating extension arm 540 and the first assembly 505 to move the workpiece W into the second assembly 510 using an automatic workpiece transfer mechanism (not shown). A position that is adjacent to the first assembly 505 and the second assembly 510 after being placed, and forms a space for processing the workpiece W or a second position of the chamber body. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs In actual operation, the starter 515 will initially drive the first assembly 505 to the first position, as shown in FIG. 2A. After reaching this position, the workpiece W can be placed on the workpiece support assembly 525 of the second assembly 510 using an automatic workpiece transfer mechanism, such as an artificial robotic arm with an end clamp that holds the workpiece W. Once the workpiece W has been placed on the workpiece support assembly 525, the starter 515 can drive the first assembly 505 toward the second assembly 510 to a second position, as shown in FIG. 2B. The workpiece holder assembly 525 will be in accordance with the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm).

經由與該第一組裝505低部表面的接觸或勢力的啓動作業 ,而合適地轉移於該第一組裝505。即如圖2B所示,工件 W係直接地沉置於熱傳送單元560的表面上,在此該者會 被予以熱處理。一般說來,工件W的上部表面會爲該工件 的裝置側邊,而非裝置、工件W的低部表面會被置放接觸 於該熱傳送單元560的上部表面。或另者,工件W的指向 可爲反置者。爲確保該工件W在處理過程中會置於該熱傳 送單元560的上部表面,該熱傳送單元56〇可包括某一或 複數個連接到某真空源的細孔(後文中將予以詳述),該真; 空源可相對於該熱傳送單元560的上部表面,而吸淨該工 件W的的低部表面。 在如圖2B所示位置處,第一組裝承體520的低部可 接合於第二組裝承體550的上部,俾構成一熱處理室體 555,該者可爲或無須大致爲氣密者。當使用該熱反應器 500時,即如本處,爲對工件進行退火,該熱處理室體555 可連續地以惰性氣體加以淨除,俾將任何氧化介質的水$ 最小化,因該者或將與銅質構成出不希望要的氧化物°胃 利於這項淨除作業,可提供該第一組裝5〇5某一或複數個 氣體注入機埠580與某一或複數個氣體排出機埠585 ° $ 開啓該些氣體注入機埠580而折覆於該承體52〇內,而該 者又會打開至置放通透於該承體52〇低部表面的眾多孔_ 。特別適於降低該處理室體555內之氧化介質的氣體混合 物,包括了氮或氫質構成氣體(5%氫氣/ 95%氬氣)。 惰氣處理環境可防止在高溫下該工件W的薄膜表面氧化’ _— __ 7?___ 一^ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家^票準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)It is appropriately transferred to the first assembly 505 through contact with the lower surface of the first assembly 505 or the activation operation of the force. That is, as shown in FIG. 2B, the work W is directly sunk on the surface of the heat transfer unit 560, and this is heat-treated here. Generally speaking, the upper surface of the workpiece W will be the device side of the workpiece, while the lower surface of the non-device, workpiece W will be placed in contact with the upper surface of the heat transfer unit 560. Or, the direction of the workpiece W may be the reverser. To ensure that the workpiece W is placed on the upper surface of the heat transfer unit 560 during processing, the heat transfer unit 56 may include one or more pores connected to a vacuum source (described in detail later). The true air source may suck the lower surface of the workpiece W relative to the upper surface of the heat transfer unit 560. At the position shown in FIG. 2B, the lower part of the first assembly carrier 520 may be joined to the upper part of the second assembly carrier 550 to form a heat treatment chamber body 555, which may or may not be substantially airtight. When using the thermal reactor 500, that is, as here, to anneal the workpiece, the heat treatment chamber body 555 can be continuously cleaned with an inert gas, thereby minimizing the water $ of any oxidizing medium because it or The undesirable oxide formed with copper is beneficial to this net removal operation, and the first assembly may be provided with one or more gas injection ports 580 and one or more gas exhaust ports. 585 ° $ The gas injection port 580 is opened and folded inside the support body 52, and the person will open to place many holes _ which penetrate the lower surface of the support body 52. The gas mixture particularly suitable for reducing the oxidizing medium in the processing chamber body 555 includes a gas composed of nitrogen or hydrogen (5% hydrogen / 95% argon). The inert gas treatment environment can prevent the film surface of the workpiece W from being oxidized at high temperature. (Notes on the back then fill out this page)

P · 線· 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(^) 而該者在氫氣構成氣體的擷氧效應的影響下會更形加劇。 除了退火作業以外的各項製程,機璋580與585可被用來 作爲該工件W所應用之其他氣體的注入與排出處。 可將其他特點倂入該熱處理器500內,以使其特別優 適於單一工件退火作業。例如,由倂合該第一組裝505與 該第二組裝510所構成的處理室體555之體積可爲相對地 小,這會使淨除作業更有效率,並藉此減少消耗高淨除性 的惰性處理氣體。此外,可供置給該第一組裝505某一或 複數個冷卻液注入機璋612和某一或複數個冷卻液排出機 埠617,對鄰近於工件w的承體520低部表面提供冷卻液 流,而這又會有助於冷卻該工件W。更進一步,該第一組 裝承體520可含有得供流體再循環的內部液流通道,俾維 持該承體520低部表面於某標定溫度。 應即知悉亦可對該第二組裝510裝接各種流體注入與 排出機埠。例如,流體機埠可爲接附於該第二組裝510以 供直接連接於該排熱槽570之用。更特別是,可直接對該 排熱槽570或該第二組裝的其他結構提供冷卻液流,以冷 卻該排熱槽570。此外,可將某一或複數個廢放機埠配置 於該第二組裝510內,以作爲處理氣體的供應及/或通風之 用。這種其中諸機埠係附接於該第二組裝510的配置方式 ,具有減少不利於諸機埠及其對應連接器之動作量的優點 ,藉此增加所對應之連接處的整體可靠性。P · Line · 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (^) The latter will be exacerbated under the influence of the oxygen capture effect of the hydrogen gas. In addition to the annealing process, the machines 580 and 585 can be used as injection and discharge points for other gases applied to the workpiece W. Other features can be incorporated into the thermal processor 500 to make it particularly suitable for single workpiece annealing operations. For example, the volume of the processing chamber body 555 formed by combining the first assembly 505 and the second assembly 510 may be relatively small, which will make the net removal operation more efficient and thereby reduce the consumption of high net removal properties. Inert processing gas. In addition, one or more coolant injection machines 璋 612 and one or more coolant discharge ports 617 may be provided for the first assembly 505 to provide coolant to the lower surface of the carrier 520 adjacent to the workpiece w. Flow, which in turn will help cool the workpiece W. Furthermore, the first set of mounting bodies 520 may contain internal liquid flow channels for fluid recirculation, so as to maintain the lower surface of the mounting body 520 at a certain calibration temperature. It should be immediately understood that various fluid injection and discharge ports can also be attached to the second assembly 510. For example, the fluid port may be attached to the second assembly 510 for direct connection to the heat sink 570. More specifically, a cooling fluid flow may be provided directly to the heat removal tank 570 or other structure of the second assembly to cool the heat removal tank 570. In addition, one or a plurality of waste machine ports may be arranged in the second assembly 510 for the supply and / or ventilation of the processing gas. This configuration in which the machine ports are attached to the second assembly 510 has the advantage of reducing the amount of movement that is not conducive to the machine ports and their corresponding connectors, thereby increasing the overall reliability of the corresponding connection.

圖2C與2D說明根據本發明所建構之熱反應器進一步 實施例。在許多方面,這項實施例略似於如前圖2A和2B 28 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)2C and 2D illustrate further embodiments of a thermal reactor constructed in accordance with the present invention. In many respects, this embodiment is similar to the previous figures 2A and 2B. 28 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm).

訂——.------線I 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(>) 所載設之實施例。不過,其差異處在於該等工件支撐元件 係安置於該第一組裝505上,而對座於該第二組裝51〇。 因此,服伺於彼些圖示內之熱反應器實施例的自動機械臂 ,當該些第一與第二組裝係位在相對載入位置處時,即可 控制該工件以置放與移除往返於該第一組裝505間。 在前述各項反應器實施例中,一旦工件W確已離置於 該熱傳送單元560,並且處理室體555亦經淨除完畢,則 該熱傳送單元560的加熱器565會開始昇溫加熱至目標處 理溫度。這些實施例之一特點,在於由控制器利用封閉迴 路控制之某種或複數個溫度回饋信號,按電能形式來提供 加熱電力給該加熱器565。該工件W接著會被握定在處理 溫度維持某段特定時間。在經過該特定時段後,該加熱器 565的電力即被關閉,並接合於該排熱槽570。根據在此進 行的一種冷卻處理方式V該排熱槽570會保持接合,一直 到溫度降至某預定溫度門檻値,例如攝氏70度,然後該排 熱槽570方得移離。按此,工件W可被冷卻至一溫度,使 其得以安全地被工件傳送機制以及後續處理室體所處理。 此外,該工件W可被冷卻至一溫度,此時電鍍金屬在被移 出該處理室體555的惰性氣體之前,會較不易受到週遭氣 層內的氧化介質所影響。 當完成冷降循環之後,用以保護該工件W確置於該熱 傳送單元560的真空電路會被關閉,並且啓動器515可根 據特定實施例而定,將該第一組裝505驅動回返至如圖2A 或圖2C所示之位置。由於在如圖2A和圖2B內該第一組 29 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) -1.----------裝·-- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 1T··Order ——.------ Line I Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 A7 B7 V. The embodiment set out in the description of the invention (>). However, the difference lies in that the workpiece supporting elements are disposed on the first assembly 505, and the counter seats are disposed on the second assembly 51. Therefore, when serving the automatic mechanical arms of the thermal reactor embodiments shown in the figures, when the first and second assembly systems are located at relative loading positions, the workpiece can be controlled to be placed and moved. Except for the first assembly 505 rooms. In the foregoing embodiments of the reactor, once the workpiece W has been removed from the heat transfer unit 560 and the processing chamber body 555 has been cleaned, the heater 565 of the heat transfer unit 560 will start to heat up to Target processing temperature. One of the features of these embodiments is that the controller uses closed circuit to control one or more temperature feedback signals to provide heating power to the heater 565 in the form of electrical energy. The workpiece W is then held at the processing temperature for a certain period of time. After the specific period of time has elapsed, the power of the heater 565 is turned off, and the heater 565 is connected to the heat sink 570. According to a cooling process V performed here, the heat sink 570 will remain engaged until the temperature drops to a predetermined temperature threshold, for example, 70 degrees Celsius, and then the heat sink 570 must be removed. According to this, the workpiece W can be cooled to a temperature so that it can be safely processed by the workpiece transfer mechanism and the subsequent processing chamber body. In addition, the workpiece W can be cooled to a temperature, and the electroplated metal is less susceptible to the influence of the oxidizing medium in the surrounding gas layer before being removed from the inert gas of the processing chamber body 555. After the completion of the cold drop cycle, the vacuum circuit used to protect the workpiece W from being placed in the heat transfer unit 560 will be closed, and the starter 515 may drive the first assembly 505 back to, for example, according to a specific embodiment. 2A or 2C. As shown in Figure 2A and Figure 2B, the first group of 29 paper sizes is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) -1. (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 1T ··

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(1) 裝505會被抬高,該些工件支架組件525自然會接合,或 是會被導向而接合,並提起該工件W,而離於該熱傳送單 元560的表面。該自動工件傳送機制接著會將工件W自該 些工件支架組件525移開,而留下該熱反應器500備妥以 接受並處理另一項工件W。當該熱反應器500正在等待接 受另一工件W時,加熱器565可被引導以開始昇溫加熱至 所欲處理溫度,或是某些中間溫度,藉以減少熱處理下一 個微電子工件所需的整體時間。同樣地,如圖2C所示實 施例的諸工件支架組件525可被導引以將工件W釋放至自 動工件傳送機制,藉以留讓該反應器500於確爲備妥俾接 收另一工件的狀態中。 圖3A-3F說明採用各式基板組態之加熱器565的不 同實施例。在一實施例中,加熱器565係建構爲一厚膜加 熱器(即利用厚膜樣式技術所建構的加熱器),而具有一低 熱質量。各個厚膜加熱器565組態可在薄型實體造型之內 容納高的電力密度,產生具有快速熱回應之低熱質量(即較 快加熱與冷卻)。在本實施例之一特點裡,給定這種厚膜加 熱器組態的低熱質量,該厚膜加熱器565可熱隔離於該第 二組裝510的其他結構。 圖3A所示爲基本型式的厚膜加熱器。即如圖繪,該 厚膜加熱器565包括一置放於兩個陶瓷基板層605之間的 高阻抗層600 ° 圖3B說明該厚膜加熱器565實施例的進一步細節。 即如圖示,該厚膜加熱器565可按薄層600所製成,其上 30 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 丨.----------·;裝—— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 1T: --線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(丨) 構建出具有位於兩個或更多陶瓷基板605間之高阻抗604 的電路樣式,而在該些高電阻性跡質604間嵌入有可選性 的真空配送電路通道603。當使用時,該些真空配送電路 通道603會被連接到外部真空供應器607。該些高電阻性 跡質604可按得將電力配送裁配爲該微電子工件形狀之樣 式所構成,而可對該工件均勻加熱。該可選性的真空配送 電路通道603會被連接到頂部基板層的孔洞606,藉以提 供對於該微電子工件低部表面的吸汲動作。如圖3A與3B 所示的實施例係特別適於諸等在加熱器565與排熱槽570 之間會需要陶瓷介面的範例。 圖3C說明該厚膜加熱器565可爲建構的第三種方式 。即如圖示,該厚膜加熱器565可用兩個或更多其間夾置 有一真空電路通道層之薄型陶瓷基板605的薄層所製成, 而一高電阻性跡質600則係置放於該厚膜加熱器565的表 面上。一介電釉面層601係沉置於該高電阻跡質604上以 保護與電性隔離功能。可視需要,將另一個介電鍍層601a 沉積於該高電阻性跡質層600與鄰接陶瓷基板605之間, 以改善陶瓷基板605與該層600間的黏附力。這項實施例 可爲相對地易於製造,因爲該真空配送通道603可完全地 切通該第二陶瓷層605,並且其後端可藉一低部、鄰近陶 瓷層而加密封。 圖3D說明該厚膜加熱器565可爲建構的第四種方式 。即如圖示,該厚膜加熱器565可爲三個或更多薄型陶瓷 基板605的薄層所製成,而於該等兩個或更多薄型陶瓷基 31 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂· 線』 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(A ) 板605之間夾置有一真空電路通道層603,以及置放於不 同組陶瓷基板605之間的高電阻性跡質600低部。再次地 ,這項實施例可爲相對地易於製造,因爲該真空配送通道 603可完全地切通該第二陶瓷層,並且其後端可藉一低部 、鄰近陶瓷層而加密封。此外,這項實施例亦特別適於諸 等在加熱器565與排熱槽570之間會需要陶瓷介面的範例 〇 圖3E說明該厚膜加熱器565可爲建構的第四種方式 。即如圖示,該厚膜加熱器565可爲單層薄型陶瓷基板 605所製作,而將一高電阻性跡質層600沉置於該厚膜加 熱器565的底部表面上。可將一層介電釉面層601係沉置 於該高電阻跡質604上以供保護與電性隔離功能。位於該 厚膜加熱器565的底部表面與排熱槽570頂部表面間的空 處,可作爲延展通透該厚膜加熱器565的孔洞606之真空 儲庫。 圖3F說明一加熱器565實施例,可用以在加熱循環過 程中,對厚膜加熱器565頂部表面與工件W間,以及在冷 卻循環過程中,對厚膜加熱器565低部表面與排熱槽570 之間,提供良好的熱接觸。爲此,對該第二陶瓷層605提 供有至少一組真空配送通道603。該真空配送通道603係 按流體通連到某一或更多的孔洞606,這些孔洞係經置放 通透於該用以接觸該工件W之上部陶瓷基板。該真空配送 通道603亦係按流體通連到某一或更多的孔洞609,而這 些孔洞則係經置放通透於加熱器565的低部表面。在加熱 32 1·----------裝--------訂---.------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) « 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(V ) 與冷卻循環兩者的過程中,該真空設備6O7皆會運作。而 在冷卻循環裡,透過孔洞609所提供的真空,將會有助於 建立加熱器565低部表面與排熱槽570之間的熱接觸效果 〇 另者,可將個別的真空配送通道603連接到可個別運 作的真空源607和608。在本實施例中,第一真空源及其 對應之真空配送通道,會讓工件W進爲與該加熱器565頂 部表面間的固穩熱接觸,而第二真空源及其對應之真空配 送通道,則會在冷卻循環過程中,讓排熱槽570進爲與該 加熱器565低部表面間的固穩熱接觸。 圖3G - 3J爲如圖3B - 3F內厚膜加熱器所採用之各種 元件的示範性平視圖。即如圖示,該示範性排設內包括眾 多依所對應之同心圓式隔離區域611而相互區隔之同心圓 式高阻抗跡質604。該些隔離區域611可包括像是陶瓷或 空氣的介電材質。當採用空氣作爲介電材質時,該些隔離 區域611可定義出實施例的真空配送通道603,即如圖3B 所示者。各個高阻抗跡質604可包含依所對應之隔離區域 613而相互隔離的諸介電節點。這些隔離區域613可包括 像是陶瓷或空氣的介電材質。此外,可對該高阻抗跡質 604按個別方式而提供電力,或是按共用電力匯排的方式 來提供電力。 圖3H爲一構築於即如圖3C、3D與3F所示第二陶瓷 層605上之真空配送通道603排設的示範性平面視圖。再 次地.,該真空配送通道603可按同心圓方式所構成,並通 33 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 言 τ 良 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 Α7 Β7 五、發明說明(Μ ) 常是接所對應之隔離區域614而相互隔離。該隔離區域 614可包括某一或複數個流體循流通道617,可提供讓流體 傳流於該真空配送通道603等間之複數個區域’使得連接 到某一或複數個配送通道603的真空源所提供的真空,確 可通流至所有的配送通道。 圖31爲最頂陶瓷層605的示範性排設上視圖。即如圖 示,可在該最頂陶瓷層605內,於恰位在該真空傳流通道 603之上的位置處(如虛線框所示)構成出諸孔洞606。根據 本圖所示之示範性排設,該些孔洞606係按等角相間之同 心圓環方式所配置。 圖3J爲該些高電阻性跡質604的進一步組態。即如圖 示,該些跡質604係按連續性螺旋而相隔以隔離區域611 的方式所排組,而該隔離區域’即如前註般’可由固態介 電材質或空氣所構成。當採用空氣時’即如前文某些實施 例中所述者,該些區域611可作爲真空傳流通道603之用 〇 圖4Α - 7Β爲在厚膜加熱器565與排熱槽570間,採 取不同介面之各種熱傳送單元560實施例。在如圖4Α和 4Β所示的實施例中,採用了固態/固態的傳導而作爲由該 厚膜加熱器565到該排熱槽570,以及由該加熱器565到 工件W之熱傳送的主要模式。在工件W的熱處理中,該 熱傳送單元560會爲如圖4Α所示之加熱狀態下。在加熱 狀態下,該排熱槽570的頂部表面會被從該熱傳送單元 560低部表面所移位,並且彼此間的體積內會被像是氮氣 34 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) .1·----------裝·-- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂· 丨線: 495885 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明ov) 之相對低度熱導氣體所塡充,該氣體可讓諸元件彼此間熱 絕緣。以這種方式來將該厚膜加熱器565隔離於該排熱槽 570將會有助於快速加熱至所欲處琿溫度,因爲在此會有 最小的熱損失。至於冷卻狀態則可如圖4B所示。在此狀 態下,該厚膜加熱器565會被關閉,並將該厚膜加熱器 565與該排熱槽570彼此相對移動,使得該厚膜加熱器565 的低部表面會接合於該排熱槽570的頂部表面。可藉由像 是反置無膨脹性、輪緣封籤來提供這種相對移動,而彼等 得啓動以對該排熱槽570分動垂直運動。 圖5A與5B說明一熱傳送560實施例,其中採用固態 /氣態/液態傳導性作爲從該厚膜加熱器565到該排熱槽570 之熱傳送的主要模式。在該實施例中,該厚膜加熱器565 與該排熱槽570係彼此永久位移於一極微距離(如0.020英 吋)。當係屬如圖5A的加熱狀態內時,該厚膜加熱器565 與該排熱槽570間的體積569會被以相對低度熱傳導氣體 所淨除,藉以將諸元件彼此間熱絕緣。當在如圖5B的冷 卻狀態下時,該厚膜加熱器565會被關閉,並且在該厚膜 加熱器565和該排熱槽570之間的體積569,會按像是氦 氣之相對高度熱傳導氣體加以淨除,而該者可作爲將熱從 厚膜加熱器565傳導到該排熱槽570的介質。這種方式可 提供熱能的有效應用與傳送效果,而無須移動諸元。特別 是,必須在該熱反應器50G處提供有氣體的注入與排出機 埠。 圖6A和6B說明一種應用強制對流與沸騰方式,作爲 35 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 訂· 線: 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(V]) 其將熱自厚膜加熱器565傳送到該排熱槽57Q之主要模式 的熱傳送單元560實施例。再次地,該厚膜加熱器565與 該排熱槽570係彼此永久位移於一極微距離(如0.020 -0.040英吋)。在如圖6A所示之加熱狀態中,該厚膜加熱 器565和該排熱槽570之間的體積569,會按相對低度熱 傳導氣體加以淨除,藉以讓諸元件間彼此熱絕緣。而在如 圖6B所示之冷卻狀態下,該厚膜加熱器565會被關閉, 並且在該厚膜加熱器565和該排熱槽570之間的體積569 ,會充滿侵犯性、高速的熱傳送液流(如水或葡萄糖),而 該者可作爲將熱從厚膜加熱器565對流傳離至該排熱槽 570的介質。本例中該排熱槽570可構成以作爲一噴灑淋 浴組裝,可均勻地將熱傳送液流遞送通透到排熱槽頂部表 面內的流體噴射孔洞之摺面,並且區域性地經由排出開口 之透穿摺面以竭盡該液流。另者,可將既用之冷卻流體予 以導向,而由加熱與排熱槽間的通道內輻射狀地排出。這 種整體方式可提供熱能的有效應用與傳送,而同樣無須移 動諸元。 圖7A和7B又說明進一步的熱傳送單元560實施例。 在該實施例裡,工件W、厚膜加熱器565與排熱槽570在 整個熱處理循環過程中係爲固定接觸。絕緣材質633的薄 層係用以將該厚膜加熱器565熱絕緣於該排熱槽570。薄 層633所用的材質與其厚度係經選取,以產得於整體熱處 理循環的加熱和冷卻子循環過程中,所展現之熱傳送單元 560效能的最佳平衡結果。這種設計可提供設計簡易性的 36 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 「裳--------訂----------線』 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(外) 優點,因無移動配件也不需要熱絕緣/傳導氣體。 在前述各個實施例裡,該排熱槽57G直接接觸到加熱 器56S,然可於冷卻循環中,另加一高度熱傳導材質於該 些接觸表面之間。這個所置放於該些接觸表面間的材質’ 最好是可回應於當加熱器565與排熱槽570彼此間直接熱 接觸時所施加的壓力而爲彈性塑形。按此方式’即可於加 熱器565與排熱槽570間存在有更爲均勻的熱傳送媒體’ 這是因爲可消除掉如加熱器565與排熱槽570的表面是直 接實體接觸,則或將出現空氣包封等現象的問題。 圖8說明一種方式,其中兩個或更多根據某一或複數 個前述實施例所建構的熱反應器可爲倂合於單一退火站台 處。在該實施例中,諸熱反應器係按堆疊式組態而置放於 承體單元700內。該承體單元700包括眾多室體單元710 ,各個包含一單一熱反應器。這些室體單元710是按高部 與低部水平隔牆715和720所定義,並且某一或複數個側 牆725。各個室體單元710的某一或複數個側牆725可包 括一自動門或寄送槽開口 730,可將各個室體單元710隔 離於週遭環境,並於工件載入與卸載作業的過程中提供工 件傳送機制可接取到該些熱反應器的功能。 圖9爲可程式化控制系統實施例之區塊略圖,可根據 本發明進一步特點而用以控制該熱反應器組裝。該控制系 統,茲槪示以900者,可包括一可程式化控制器905,諸 如可程式化邏輯控制器、微控制器、微處理器等。該控制 器905接收資料並將資料通訊往返於用以間適合控制該熱 37 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) •I*---------裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 1T·Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (1) The assembly 505 will be lifted, and the workpiece holder assemblies 525 will naturally join, or will be guided and joined, and the workpiece W will be lifted. Away from the surface of the heat transfer unit 560. The automatic workpiece transfer mechanism then removes the workpiece W from the workpiece support assemblies 525 and leaves the thermal reactor 500 ready to accept and process another workpiece W. When the thermal reactor 500 is waiting to receive another workpiece W, the heater 565 may be directed to start heating up to a desired processing temperature, or some intermediate temperature, thereby reducing the overall required to heat-treat the next microelectronic workpiece. time. Similarly, the workpiece support assembly 525 of the embodiment shown in FIG. 2C may be guided to release the workpiece W to the automatic workpiece transfer mechanism, thereby leaving the reactor 500 in a state where it is indeed ready to receive another workpiece. in. 3A-3F illustrate different embodiments of the heater 565 using various substrate configurations. In one embodiment, the heater 565 is configured as a thick film heater (ie, a heater constructed using a thick film pattern technology) and has a low thermal mass. Each thick film heater 565 configuration can accommodate a high power density within a thin solid shape, resulting in a low thermal mass (i.e., faster heating and cooling) with fast thermal response. In one feature of this embodiment, given the low thermal mass of this thick film heater configuration, the thick film heater 565 can be thermally isolated from other structures of the second assembly 510. Fig. 3A shows a basic type of thick film heater. That is, as shown in the drawing, the thick film heater 565 includes a high-resistance layer 600 disposed between two ceramic substrate layers 605. FIG. 3B illustrates further details of the thick film heater 565 embodiment. That is, as shown in the figure, the thick film heater 565 can be made according to a thin layer 600, and the 30 paper sizes on it are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 丨 .------ ---- ·; Installation—— (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 1T: --Line · Printed by the Employee Consumption Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 A7 B7 V. Invention Description (丨) Constructed A circuit pattern having a high impedance 604 between two or more ceramic substrates 605, and an optional vacuum distribution circuit channel 603 embedded between the high resistance traces 604. When used, these vacuum distribution circuit channels 603 are connected to an external vacuum supply 607. The high-resistance traces 604 can be formed in such a manner that the power distribution is tailored to the shape of the microelectronic workpiece, and the workpiece can be uniformly heated. The optional vacuum distribution circuit channel 603 is connected to the hole 606 in the top substrate layer, thereby providing a suction action for the lower surface of the microelectronic workpiece. The embodiments shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B are particularly suitable for examples where a ceramic interface may be required between the heater 565 and the heat sink 570. FIG. 3C illustrates a third way that the thick film heater 565 can be constructed. That is, as shown, the thick film heater 565 can be made of two or more thin layers of a thin ceramic substrate 605 with a vacuum circuit channel layer sandwiched therebetween, and a high-resistance trace 600 is placed on The thick film heater 565 is on the surface. A dielectric glaze layer 601 is deposited on the high-resistance trace 604 to protect and electrically isolate it. Optionally, another dielectric plating layer 601a is deposited between the high-resistance trace layer 600 and the adjacent ceramic substrate 605 to improve the adhesion between the ceramic substrate 605 and the layer 600. This embodiment can be relatively easy to manufacture because the vacuum distribution channel 603 can completely cut through the second ceramic layer 605, and its rear end can be sealed by a lower portion adjacent to the ceramic layer. FIG. 3D illustrates a fourth way that the thick film heater 565 can be constructed. That is, as shown in the figure, the thick film heater 565 may be made of three or more thin ceramic substrates 605, and on these two or more thin ceramic substrates 31, the paper size is applicable to Chinese national standards ( CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) Packing --- (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page) Order and line "Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau Employee Consumption Cooperative of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 Employee Consumption of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Cooperative printed A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (A) A vacuum circuit channel layer 603 is sandwiched between the plates 605, and the low-resistance trace 600 is placed between different groups of ceramic substrates 605. Again, this embodiment can be relatively easy to manufacture, because the vacuum distribution channel 603 can completely cut through the second ceramic layer, and its rear end can be sealed by a lower portion adjacent to the ceramic layer. In addition, this embodiment is also particularly suitable for examples where a ceramic interface may be required between the heater 565 and the heat sink 570. FIG. 3E illustrates that the thick film heater 565 can be a fourth way of construction. That is, as shown, the thick film heater 565 can be made of a single-layer thin ceramic substrate 605, and a high-resistance trace layer 600 is sunk on the bottom surface of the thick film heater 565. A dielectric glaze layer 601 can be deposited on the high-resistance trace 604 for protection and electrical isolation. The space between the bottom surface of the thick film heater 565 and the top surface of the heat exhaust groove 570 can be used as a vacuum reservoir extending through the holes 606 of the thick film heater 565. FIG. 3F illustrates an embodiment of a heater 565, which can be used to heat the top surface of the thick film heater 565 and the workpiece W during the heating cycle, and the lower surface of the thick film heater 565 and the heat during the cooling cycle Provide good thermal contact between the slots 570. To this end, the second ceramic layer 605 is provided with at least one set of vacuum distribution channels 603. The vacuum distribution channel 603 is fluidly connected to one or more holes 606, and the holes are placed and penetrated through the ceramic substrate for contacting the upper part of the workpiece W. The vacuum distribution channel 603 is also fluidly connected to one or more holes 609, and these holes are placed through the lower surface of the heater 565. In the heating 32 1 ---------- install -------- order ---.------ line (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) « This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 5. During the process of both the invention description (V) and the cooling cycle, the vacuum Device 6O7 will all operate. In the cooling cycle, the vacuum provided through the holes 609 will help to establish the thermal contact between the lower surface of the heater 565 and the heat exhaust groove 570. In addition, individual vacuum distribution channels 603 can be connected To individually operable vacuum sources 607 and 608. In this embodiment, the first vacuum source and its corresponding vacuum distribution channel allow the workpiece W to enter a solid and thermal contact with the top surface of the heater 565, and the second vacuum source and its corresponding vacuum distribution channel , During the cooling cycle, the heat exhaust groove 570 is brought into solid and thermal contact with the lower surface of the heater 565. 3G-3J are exemplary plan views of various components used in the thick-film heater shown in Figs. 3B-3F. That is, as shown in the figure, the exemplary arrangement includes a plurality of concentric circle high-impedance traces 604 which are separated from each other according to the corresponding concentric circle isolation regions 611. The isolation regions 611 may include a dielectric material such as ceramic or air. When air is used as the dielectric material, the isolated regions 611 can define the vacuum distribution channel 603 of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3B. Each high-impedance trace 604 may include dielectric nodes that are isolated from each other according to the corresponding isolation region 613. These isolation regions 613 may include a dielectric material such as ceramic or air. In addition, the high-impedance trace 604 may be provided with power individually or with a shared power bus. Fig. 3H is an exemplary plan view of the arrangement of the vacuum distribution channels 603 arranged on the second ceramic layer 605, i.e., as shown in Figs. 3C, 3D and 3F. Once again, the vacuum distribution channel 603 can be constructed in the form of concentric circles, and pass 33 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). x 297 mm) Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 Α7 Β7 5. The invention description (M) is usually isolated from each other by the corresponding isolation area 614. The isolation area 614 may include one or more fluid circulation channels 617, which may provide a plurality of areas for allowing fluid to flow between the vacuum distribution channels 603 and the like, such that a vacuum source connected to one or more distribution channels 603 is provided. The vacuum provided can indeed flow to all distribution channels. FIG. 31 is a top view of an exemplary arrangement of the topmost ceramic layer 605. That is, as shown in the figure, holes 606 can be formed in the topmost ceramic layer 605 at a position just above the vacuum flow channel 603 (shown as a dashed box). According to the exemplary arrangement shown in the figure, the holes 606 are arranged in the form of concentric circles with equal angles. FIG. 3J is a further configuration of the high-resistance traces 604. That is, as shown in the figure, the traces 604 are arranged in a continuous spiral and separated by an isolation region 611, and the isolation region, that is, as described above, may be composed of solid dielectric material or air. When air is used, that is, as described in some embodiments, the areas 611 can be used as the vacuum flow channel 603. Figures 4A-7B are taken between the thick film heater 565 and the heat exhaust tank 570. Various embodiments of heat transfer units 560 with different interfaces. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, solid-state / solid-state conduction is used as the main heat transfer from the thick film heater 565 to the heat sink 570, and from the heater 565 to the workpiece W. mode. In the heat treatment of the workpiece W, the heat transfer unit 560 is in a heated state as shown in FIG. 4A. In the heating state, the top surface of the heat removal tank 570 will be displaced from the lower surface of the heat transfer unit 560, and the volume between each other will be like nitrogen. 34 The paper size applies to Chinese National Standards (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) .1 · ---------- installation-- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Order · 丨 Line: 495885 A7 B7 Ministry of Economy Wisdom Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Property Bureau. V. Invention Description ov) It is filled with relatively low thermal conductivity gas, which can thermally insulate the components from each other. Isolating the thick film heater 565 from the heat removal tank 570 in this manner will help to quickly heat to the desired temperature because there will be minimal heat loss here. As for the cooling state, it can be shown in FIG. 4B. In this state, the thick film heater 565 is turned off, and the thick film heater 565 and the heat exhaust groove 570 are moved relative to each other, so that the lower surface of the thick film heater 565 is joined to the heat exhaust The top surface of the groove 570. This relative movement may be provided by, for example, an inverted non-inflatable, rim seal, and they must be activated to transfer vertical movement to the row of heat sinks 570. 5A and 5B illustrate a heat transfer 560 embodiment in which solid / gaseous / liquid conductivity is used as the main mode of heat transfer from the thick film heater 565 to the heat sink 570. In this embodiment, the thick film heater 565 and the heat sink 570 are permanently displaced from each other by an extremely small distance (e.g., 0.020 inches). When it is in the heating state as shown in FIG. 5A, the volume 569 between the thick film heater 565 and the heat exhaust groove 570 is cleaned by a relatively low degree of heat conduction gas, thereby thermally insulating the components from each other. When in the cooling state as shown in FIG. 5B, the thick film heater 565 will be turned off, and the volume 569 between the thick film heater 565 and the heat sink 570 will be like the relative height of helium The heat-conducting gas is removed, and this can be used as a medium for conducting heat from the thick-film heater 565 to the heat-dissipating tank 570. This method can provide effective application and transmission of thermal energy without moving elements. In particular, a gas injection and discharge port must be provided at 50G of the thermal reactor. Figures 6A and 6B illustrate a method of applying forced convection and boiling as 35 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Binding · Thread: This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) ) 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (V)) The embodiment of the heat transfer unit 560 that transfers heat from the thick film heater 565 to the heat sink 57Q. Again, the thick film heater 565 and the heat sink 570 are permanently displaced from each other by a very small distance (e.g., 0.020-0.040 inches). In the heating state shown in FIG. 6A, the volume 569 between the thick film heater 565 and the heat sink 570 will be netted off with a relatively low degree of heat conduction gas to thermally insulate the components from each other. In the cooling state shown in FIG. 6B, the thick film heater 565 will be turned off, and the volume 569 between the thick film heater 565 and the heat sink 570 will be filled with aggressive, high-speed heat. A liquid stream (such as water or glucose) is transmitted, which can serve as a medium for convectively transferring heat from the thick film heater 565 to the heat removal tank 570. In this example, the heat removal tank 570 can be configured as a spray shower assembly, which can evenly transfer the heat transfer liquid flow through the folds of the fluid spray holes in the top surface of the heat removal tank, and regionally through the discharge opening. Penetrate the folds to drain the flow. Alternatively, the used cooling fluid may be guided and discharged radially from the passage between the heating and heat removal tank. This holistic approach provides efficient application and transfer of thermal energy without the need to move elements. 7A and 7B illustrate yet another embodiment of a heat transfer unit 560. In this embodiment, the workpiece W, the thick film heater 565, and the heat removal tank 570 are in fixed contact throughout the heat treatment cycle. A thin layer of insulating material 633 is used to thermally insulate the thick-film heater 565 from the heat sink 570. The material and thickness of the thin layer 633 are selected to produce the best balance of the performance of the heat transfer unit 560 during the heating and cooling sub-cycles of the overall heat processing cycle. This design can provide 36 paper sizes for design simplicity. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) "Shang ------ --Order ---------- Line 』Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (outside) Advantages, because there is no moving parts and no thermal insulation / conductive gas is required. In each of the foregoing embodiments, the heat sink 57G directly contacts the heater 56S, but can be added in the cooling cycle with a highly thermally conductive material between the contact surfaces. This is placed between the contact surfaces The material of 'is preferably elastically shaped in response to the pressure applied when the heater 565 and the heat sink 570 are in direct thermal contact with each other. In this way, it can be used between the heater 565 and the heat sink 570. There is a more uniform heat transfer medium. This is because it eliminates the problem that if the heater 565 is in direct physical contact with the surface of the heat removal tank 570, air encapsulation will occur. Figure 8 illustrates one way. Two or more of them based on some or plural The thermal reactor constructed in the foregoing embodiment may be coupled to a single annealing station. In this embodiment, the thermal reactors are placed in a carrier unit 700 in a stacked configuration. The carrier unit 700 It includes a plurality of chamber units 710, each including a single thermal reactor. These chamber units 710 are defined by high and low horizontal partition walls 715 and 720, and one or more side walls 725. Each chamber unit One or more side walls 725 of 710 may include an automatic door or a slot opening 730, which can isolate each chamber body unit 710 from the surrounding environment, and provide a workpiece transfer mechanism during the loading and unloading of workpieces. The functions of these thermal reactors are received. Figure 9 is a block diagram of an embodiment of a programmable control system, which can be used to control the assembly of the thermal reactor according to further features of the present invention. The control system is shown below 900 may include a programmable controller 905, such as a programmable logic controller, a microcontroller, a microprocessor, etc. The controller 905 receives data and communicates data to and from the controller for controlling the heat.Paper scale applicable Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 size (210 X 297 mm) • I * --------- equipment --- (Please read the notes on the back of this page and then fill in) 1T ·

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(β) 反應器的周邊諸元。例如,該控制器905可與一自動式氣 流量計/閥系統910相互通訊。該自動式氣流量計/閥系統 910可控制提供給該熱反應器的各種氣體,像是淨除氣體 等,的流動狀況。該自動式氣流系統910亦可用以控制如 圖3Β - 3F所示之真空設備607及/或608的作業,在適當 時刻開啓或關閉該設備。 控制該熱反應器內的退火溫度,亦可由該控制器905 透過相對應而接於某一反應器溫度感測/供應系統915之介 面所掌控。該反應器溫度感測/供應系統915包括複數個用 以監測熱反應器內的溫度之溫度感測器。該系統915亦可 包括一電力供應器,可回應於自該控制器905處所通訊傳 得之資料,而提供必要的電力給高阻抗層的電子跡質604 ( 圖3A-3F)。可在該可程式化控制器905中採用各種已知 的溫度控制演謂法以利本項功能。 元件驅動系統920與叉具冷卻組裝925可分別操作該 驅動器530 (如圖2Α - 2D)以及排熱槽570。更特別是,驅 動系統920可操控該驅動器530以相對彼此移動該些第一 與第二組裝510、520,俾回應於自該可程式化控制器905 處所收到的各項指令,而進行載入/卸載作業以及工件W 處理作業。該驅動系統920亦可將表指出該些第一與第二 組裝510、520相對位置的位置資訊傳知給控制器905,而 這可由該控制器905用以於熱反應器運作的過程中,得以 適當地定位出各組裝的位置。 冷卻組裝系統925可作爲兩項目的。首先,.系統925 38 ^紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ' 1·----------裝—— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂· -丨線: 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(決) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 可用以回應於自該控制器905處所收到的各項指令’來控 制加熱器與排熱槽570間的相對動作。此外’系統925可 回應於自該控制器905處所收到的各項指令’藉由控制提 供給該排熱槽的冷卻氣體,而來控制該排熱槽570的溫度 。爲此,該系統925亦可包括某一或複數個溫度感測器’ 監視該排熱槽570的溫度,並且將表指該項溫度的資料傳 送給該控制器905。該控制器905可接著利甩這項溫度資 訊,以導引該系統925將排熱槽570冷卻至目標溫度。 該控制器905亦可與某一或複數個安全關機元件930 相互通訊。當控制器偵測到某一或複數個符合於該熱反應 器之安全性的狀況時,該控制器905就會隨即啓動這些安 全關機元件930。例如,回應於某加熱叉具、反應器室體 等溫度過高的狀況,該些安全關機元件930會被控制器 905用來關閉該,熱反應器系統。應即知悉依據本列教示之 觀點,該控制器905亦得偵知其他安全性狀況,並隨以啓 動彼等安全關機元件930。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 圖10爲根據本發明實施例而用於熱處理微電子工件 W之裝置1000的部分略示、部分剖視、側視等構圖。按 本實施例之一特點,該裝置1〇〇〇包括兩個熱處理室體 1003 (圖示爲上部室體1003a和低部室體1003b),並由裝 置支架1002所支撐。各個室體1003可具有一基座1010, 以及一移動朝向與遠離該基座1010俾關閉與開啓該室體 1003的室蓋1020。工件W可在室體1003由複數個工件支 架1070所支撐。按本實施例之一特點,該裝置1〇〇〇可對 39 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(β ) 該工件W的某選定材質(像是銅質或其他金屬)進行退火。 另者,該裝置1000可執行其他高溫製程,即如後文所加詳 述者。當該裝置1000加熱與冷卻該工件w時,在製作程 序的加熱階段裡,這些工件支架1070可移低該工件w俾 接合於熱源1040。而在製作程序的冷卻階段中,某第一排 熱槽1060可昇起以接合於該熱源1040的相反表面,俾冷 卻該熱源1040和該工件W兩者。在冷卻階段後,該第一 排熱槽1060可降下以接合於某第二排熱槽1050,在此會 冷卻該第一排熱槽1060以適妥於另一個循環。該室蓋 1020會接著移離於該基座1〇1〇,並將該工件w移出。在 本實施例之一較適特點裡,該熱源1040會被放在該工件 W與該第一排熱槽1060之間,而該第一排熱槽1060則是 位在該熱源1040下方。) 在一實施例沖1,該裝置1000的支架1002可包括一個 由眾多縱架1004 (圖9內可見其中兩者)所定義出的框架, 而各個具有一接收通道1〇〇5。可藉由將從各個室體1003 基座1010而向外延展之標片1006,插置到所對應之通道 1005 ’並將該些標片1006鎖緊於諸縱架1〇〇4的方式,而 令諸室體1003固定接附於諸縱架1〇〇4。按此,諸室體 1003在該傳送機制620按垂直方向移動,以選擇性地置放 某單〜微電子工件W於上部室體i〇〇3a或低部室體l〇〇3b 的過程中’確可保持固定不動。另一方面,除可按垂直方 向移動該傳送機制620以外或甚取而代之,諸室體1003可 爲個別地或共集地耦接於某一或複數個啓動器1007,俾以 40 本紙張尺度細家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (β) The surrounding elements of the reactor. For example, the controller 905 may communicate with an automatic air flow meter / valve system 910. The automatic gas flow meter / valve system 910 can control the flow conditions of various gases, such as degassing, etc., supplied to the thermal reactor. The automatic airflow system 910 can also be used to control the operation of the vacuum equipment 607 and / or 608 as shown in Figs. 3B-3F, and the equipment can be turned on or off at an appropriate time. Controlling the annealing temperature in the thermal reactor can also be controlled by the controller 905 through a corresponding interface connected to a certain reactor temperature sensing / supply system 915. The reactor temperature sensing / supply system 915 includes a plurality of temperature sensors for monitoring the temperature in the thermal reactor. The system 915 can also include a power supply that can provide the necessary power to the electronic traces 604 of the high-impedance layer in response to data communicated from the controller 905 (Figures 3A-3F). Various programmable temperature control algorithms can be used in the programmable controller 905 to facilitate this function. The component driving system 920 and the fork cooling assembly 925 can operate the driver 530 (see FIGS. 2A-2D) and the heat sink 570, respectively. More specifically, the driving system 920 can control the driver 530 to move the first and second assemblies 510 and 520 relative to each other, and respond to various instructions received from the programmable controller 905 to perform the loading. Loading / unloading jobs and workpiece W processing jobs. The driving system 920 can also communicate the position information indicating the relative positions of the first and second assemblies 510 and 520 to the controller 905, which can be used by the controller 905 during the operation of the thermal reactor. The position of each assembly can be appropriately positioned. The cooling assembly system 925 is available as two items. First, the system 925 38 ^ paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) '1 · ---------- installation-(Please read the precautions on the back before (Fill in this page) Order ·-丨: Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of invention (determined) (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) It can be used to respond to the control The commands received by the controller 905 are used to control the relative movement between the heater and the heat exhausting tank 570. In addition, the 'system 925 may respond to various commands received from the controller 905' to control the temperature of the heat removal tank 570 by controlling the cooling gas supplied to the heat removal tank. To this end, the system 925 may also include one or more temperature sensors' to monitor the temperature of the heat sink 570, and transmit data indicating the temperature to the controller 905. The controller 905 may then use this temperature information to guide the system 925 to cool the heat sink 570 to a target temperature. The controller 905 can also communicate with one or more safety shutdown elements 930. When the controller detects one or more conditions that meet the safety conditions of the thermal reactor, the controller 905 then activates the safety shutdown elements 930. For example, in response to an excessively high temperature condition of a heating fork, a reactor chamber, etc., the safety shutdown elements 930 are used by the controller 905 to shut down the thermal reactor system. It should be immediately known that, based on the teachings of this column, the controller 905 may also detect other security conditions and then activate their secure shutdown element 930. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs FIG. 10 is a partial schematic, partial cross-section, side view, and the like composition of an apparatus 1000 for heat-treating a microelectronic workpiece W according to an embodiment of the present invention. According to a feature of this embodiment, the apparatus 1000 includes two heat treatment chamber bodies 1003 (illustrated as an upper chamber body 1003a and a lower chamber body 1003b), and is supported by a device bracket 1002. Each of the chambers 1003 may have a base 1010 and a chamber cover 1020 that is moved toward and away from the base 1010 and closes and opens the chamber 1003. The workpiece W may be supported in the chamber body 1003 by a plurality of workpiece supports 1070. According to one of the characteristics of this embodiment, the device 1000 can apply the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) to 39 paper sizes. 495885 A7 B7 2. Description of the invention (β) A selected material (such as copper or other metal) of the workpiece W is annealed. In addition, the device 1000 may perform other high-temperature processes, that is, as described in detail later. When the device 1000 heats and cools the workpiece w, during the heating stage of the manufacturing process, the workpiece holders 1070 can move the workpiece w 俾 down to engage the heat source 1040. In the cooling stage of the manufacturing process, a first row of heat sinks 1060 can be raised to engage the opposite surface of the heat source 1040, and both the heat source 1040 and the workpiece W can be cooled. After the cooling stage, the first row of heat sinks 1060 can be lowered to engage a second row of heat sinks 1050, where the first row of heat sinks 1060 are cooled to fit another cycle. The chamber cover 1020 is then removed from the base 1010, and the workpiece w is removed. In a suitable feature of this embodiment, the heat source 1040 is placed between the workpiece W and the first row of heat sinks 1060, and the first row of heat sinks 1060 is located below the heat source 1040. ) In one embodiment, the bracket 1002 of the device 1000 may include a frame defined by a plurality of vertical frames 1004 (both of which can be seen in FIG. 9), and each has a receiving channel 105. The labels 1006 extending outward from the base 1010 of each chamber body 1003 can be inserted into the corresponding channels 1005 'and the labels 1006 can be locked to the longitudinal frames 104. The chambers 1003 are fixedly attached to the longitudinal frames 1004. According to this, the chambers 1003 move vertically in the conveying mechanism 620 to selectively place a single ~ microelectronic workpiece in the process of the upper chamber 1003a or the lower chamber 1003b ' It does stay fixed. On the other hand, in addition to or in place of the transmission mechanism 620 being moved in the vertical direction, the chambers 1003 may be individually or collectively coupled to a certain or multiple actuators 1007, and the paper size is as small as 40 papers. Home Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 Public Love) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

495885495885

經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明) 垂直移動諸室體1003。 在本實施例之進一步特點中,諸室體1003可具有一模 組式架構。例如,該低部室體l〇〇3b的室蓋1〇20可依據亦 可整合於該上部室體l〇〇3a的基座1010。而該上部室體 1003a的室蓋1020則可由機蓋1030所支撐。如此,任何 數量的室體1003皆可按此方式相互堆疊,藉由整合某室體 與其上的室體之諸特點,而得減少該裝置1000的總元件數 量。這種配置方式亦可降低多重室體所需之空間循跡。與 此同時,這種配置方式可提供模組化架構的彈適性。而在 另者實施例中,裝置1〇〇〇得具有其他的模組化配置方式, 即如依逐側方式所排整者。 該些各室體1003的室蓋1020可爲耦接至室蓋啓動器 1021,以從開啓位置(如圖10所示)向下移動到一關閉位置 。該上部室體l〇03a的室蓋啓動器1021可爲接附到機蓋 1030,而該低部室體1003b的室蓋啓動器1021則可爲接附 到該上部室體l〇〇3a的基座1010。各個室蓋啓動器1021 可包括一空氣啓動風箱,當充氣時可將室蓋1020向下移動 。在本發明之一特點中,各個風箱可向周邊360°延展而構 成一封閉圓環。另者,眾多風箱或其他啓動器可按空間相 隔環置於該室蓋1020而置放。在任一實施例中,當風箱內 的空氣壓力被釋放掉時,某一或複數個彈簧(未以圖示)可 將該室蓋1020回返到開啓(上部)位置。 當該室蓋1020位在封閉位置處時,該室蓋1020與基 座1010可定義出周繞於該微電子工件W的室體體積1008 41 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ------------裝--------訂---«------線 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) « 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(q ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 。即如按參酌於圖2B所示者,在退火過程中,最好是可 將環繞於該微電子工件W的區域予以除淨會較爲有利。因 此,該室蓋1020可包含一除淨流體流道1022,將除淨流 體(如氮者)經由摺面1027而傳送到室體體積1008。該摺面 1027係齊準於除淨流體擴散平板1025,佈穿有可直接導引 進入該室體體積1008內的除淨流體孔洞1024。該流道 1022亦可透過連接過道1028a而耦接於除淨流體機埠1023 。該除淨流體機埠1023可被連接到一除淨流體源(未以圖 示)。在一實施例裡,上部室體1003a的除淨流體機埠 1023可位於機蓋1030內,而低部室體1003b的除淨流體 機埠1023則可位於該上部室體l〇〇3a的基座1010內。兩 個室體1003的連接過道1028a可沿邊向外延伸,而耦接至 該裝置1000外部表面之除淨流體機璋1023,並可向上延 伸以避免干擾到環狀的室蓋啓動器1021。該除淨流體可經 由該裝置1000外部表面之除淨流體離出開口 1026,而排 離該室體體積1008。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在退火製程的高溫過程中,微電子工件W可接合於該 熱源1040。爲此,該熱源1040的上部表面包括一可藉由 傳導作用,將熱傳送給該微電子工件之固態材質。該熱源 1040亦可包括一耦接於真空源(未以圖示)的真空孔洞1041 ,後文中將對此詳述,藉以於加熱過程中,得抽近該微電 子工件W而維持與熱源1040間的緊密接合狀態。例如, 該熱源1040可相對於該基座1010而由眾多熱源支架1044 所支撐,至少其中一者含有可液流連通於該真空孔洞1041 42 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(<) 的真空過道1043 (圖示於該低部室體i〇〇3b內)。該真空過 道1043也可(經由連接過道i〇28b)連接到該裝置1〇〇〇外部 表面之加熱器真空機璋1042,俾稱接於該真空源。 在退火製程的冷卻部分裡,該第一排熱槽1060可昇起 以接合於該熱源1040,並藉傳導效果冷卻該熱源1〇40和 該微電子工件W兩者。按此,該第—排熱槽106()可爲耦 接於一排熱槽啓動器1061,該者可將該第一排熱槽1〇60 向上移動以接合於該熱源1040。在一實施例中,該排熱槽 啓動器1061可包括一氣體驅動式風箱,槪似於前述之室蓋 啓動器1021者。或另一方面,該排熱槽啓動器1〇61可具 有其他組態,可將該第一排熱槽1060向上移動以接合於該 熱源1040,和向下移動而卸離於該熱源1〇40。 在本實施例之進一步特點中,該第一排熱槽1060可包 括一真空供應通道1062,該者係(經由連接過道l〇28c)連 接至該裝置1000外部表面之真空機埠1065。該真空供應 通道1062係耦接於該第一排熱槽1060上部表面內之某一 或複數個放射狀的真空通道1063與某一或複數個圓環狀的 真空通道1064,藉以當該熱源1040與該第一排熱槽1060 係彼此接合時,可將該第一排熱槽1060汲進而緊密地熱接 觸於該熱源1040。該第一排熱槽1060的上部表面內亦可 包括一個可壓縮、具傳導性的熱襯墊1066,該者具有一接 合表面1067,而當該第一排熱槽1060係屬其昇起位置時 ,可供與該熱源1040的密切熱接觸。在該實施例的另一特 點裡,該第一排熱槽1060的低部表面可包括一個可壓縮、 43 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) i·---------«-裝 (請先閱讀背面之注咅心事項再填寫本頁) 訂——-I------線 « 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A7 __________-—---- 五、發明說明(〇Λ ) 具傳導性而槪似於該襯墊1066者的熱襯墊,以改善與第二 排熱槽1050間的熱接觸。 在一實施例裡,該第一排熱槽1060不具作用中的冷卻 元件。按此,這項配置方式的優點在於不會有連接到該第 一排熱槽1060的冷卻流體供應線路,而這可消除掉有關接 流於某可移動式排熱槽之流體耦接設計的複雜性。代之者 ,當該第一排熱槽1060卸離於該熱源1040而接合於該第 二排熱槽1050時,該第二排熱槽1〇50可爲冷卻運作並得 冷卻該第一排熱槽1060。按此,該第二排熱槽1〇5〇可包 括一耦接於冷卻流體供應機埠和回返機埠的冷卻通道1054 ,後文中將參酌於圖18而對彼等加以詳述。該第二排熱槽 1050可包括一冷卻組件覆帽1051 :以密封並部分地定義出 該冷卻通道1054,對此亦將於&文中參酌圖18而加以詳 述。而在另外的實施例裡,除運作冷卻該第二排熱槽1050 外,可另加,或代之,以令該第一排熱槽1060 (如藉冷卻 流體)爲運作冷卻。這種配置方式可增快該第一排熱槽 1060 (及/或熱源1040與工件W)冷卻的速度,這是因爲當 該第一排熱槽1060接食於該熱源Γ040時,即可冷卻該第 一排熱槽1060 〇 圖11爲參酌於前述圖10之熱源1040實施例的部分爆 出、等構視圖。在該實施例之一特點裡,該熱源1040可包 括三個陶瓷平板1046,如圖11中繪示爲上層陶瓷平板 1046a、中層陶瓷平板l〇46b以及底層陶瓷平板1046c。該 上層陶瓷平板1046a包括可汲引微電子工件W (如圖10)緊 44 ί紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) " -I.----------•裝---- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂——·------線 « 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(AV ) 密熱接合於該熱源1〇4〇的真空孔洞1041。該中層陶瓷平 板1046b包括可提供該真空孔洞1〇41與加熱器真空機捧 1042 (如圖10)間之流體傳流功能的真空通道1047。諸真空 通道1047裡至少某者會包括一齊準於該熱源支架ι〇44的 真空過道1043 (如圖1〇)之耦接機埠1045。而該底層陶瓷 平板1046c包括可向上延展,而通透該中層陶瓷平板 l〇46b與上層陶瓷平板l〇46a內所對應之校準孔穴1048的 校準角針1049,藉以讓三個陶瓷平板HM6得彼此齊準。 電子連接器1084可將一電子元件接合於該底層陶瓷平板 1046c的低部表面,即如後文中參酌於圖13和16所進而 詳述。 圖12爲根據本發明另一實施例之熱源1140的部分上 視等構圖式。在本實施例之一特點中,熱源1140包括一單 一陶瓷平板Π46,該者具有直接構成於該單一陶瓷平板 1146上部表面內的複數個真空通道1147。諸真空通道 1147中至少一者包括一通道機蓋1139,其一端可定義出耦 接機埠1145,彼者係經組態設定以齊準於如前圖10所述 之真空過道1043。該通道機蓋1139可進一步包括具有真 空凹溝1138的底層表面,該凹構可提供該耦接機埠1145 與諸真空通道Π47間的流體傳流之用。該些真空通道 1147係直接受曝於該微電子工件W向下朝對的表面,以 汲引該工件W接合於該熱源1140。。爲此,參酌於前圖 12所述熱源1H0之一特性,在於彼者可按單一陶瓷平板 1146所製作,而無須複數個該款平板。這種配置方式之一 45 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 「裝--------1T---.------線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(岣) 優點爲這可減少製作成本,並增加熱源1140的可靠性。 在按參考前圖11與12之任一熱源1040與1140實施 例的情況下,該熱源可進一步包括一熱產生器。例如’即 如圖13所示,可將一電子兀件1080直接附接到及/或併加 整合於該熱源1〇4(Γ的低部表面。爲此’該電子元件1〇80 可相較於某些傳統式系統而更有效率地供應電力給該熱源 1040,並可較不易自該熱源1〇40剝離。在本實施例之一特 點中,該電子元件1080可包括個別而得獨立提供電力給該 熱源1040之內部區域1088和外部區域1087的各式電路。 在本實施例之一特點中,兩個內部電路1082可提供電力給 內部區域1088,而兩個外部電路1083可提供電力給外部 區域1087。諸電路1082、1083各者可包括兩個用以耦接 到電力來源的接觸襯墊1081,即如參酌於圖16而爲進一 步詳述者。對此,可爲裁設該電子元件1080,而以負責或 因微電子工件W (及該熱源1040)某局部因相較他處而屬互 異之加熱速率要求。例如,當微電子工件W周邊區域處的 熱損失大於微電子工件W內部處的熱損失時,該電子元件 1080的外部區域1087可被提供每單位面積上較爲大量的 電力,以移均所預期之熱損。而在其他的實施例裡,該電 子元件1080 (或其他熱產生裝置)可加裁設,根據該熱源 1〇4〇及/或該微電子工件W的熱傳送特徵,對微電子工件 W提供差異性或均勻性加熱方式。 圖14爲熱源1240的頂部平視圖,而按在該熱源1240 的朝上表面上所置測之熱分析結果。該熱源1240.係置放鄰 46 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 訂· 495885 A7 一 _B7____ 五、發明說明(vV) 接於室體邊牆1281,並包括一內部區域1288和一外部區 域1287。該熱源1240可進一步包括一機格1249以容納工 件支架1070 (如圖10)。爲該熱源1240實施例所進行之熱 分析結果(其中微電子工件W係架置於該熱源1240),標指 出可按該熱源1240每單位面積不同的速率來提供電力,藉 以均勻地加熱該微電子工件W。例如,該外部區域1287 可包括一中央部分1287a、位於該中央部分1287a各側上 的諸外圍區域1287b,和一鄰近於該熱源1240接觸襯墊的 接觸區域1287c。在一實施例中,送至外圍區域1287b的 每單位面積電力,可約爲提供給中央部分1287a每單位面 積電力的90%。當該熱源1240包括一阻抗性電子元件時, 可按該項爲其電力,或另者該電力係由其他來源所提供。 在任一實施例中,電力可正比於供應給該熱源1240熱的速 率,或是傳送給該微電子工件W之熱的速率。此外,可供 應給該接觸區域1287c的每單位面積電力,可約爲供應給 該中央部分1287a每單位面積電力的150%。在其他的實施 例中,供應給各區域1287a- 1287c的相對電力値之差異型 ,可爲例如根據該熱源1240和接合於該熱源1240之微電 子工件W的特定特徵而定。 在一實施例中,可依據對於該熱源1240中點C處距 離的函數,來改變單位面積所供應的電力。例如,每單位 面積的電力可按放射狀而向外方向遞增,使得該熱源1240 的外部邊緣電力,相較於該熱源1240中點C處單位面積 的電力約增高7.5%。按此,在該熱源1240上任何局部位 47 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明) 置的電力可由下式所給定: [1] ^local = P center 1 + 其中Ρ/πα/ =單位面積上的局部電力 ^center =供應給熱源中心處的單位面積電力 a =電力增加因數(如7.5%) r =局部半徑 R =熱源周緣之半徑 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 在一實施例中,該α可爲7.5%,而在其他的實施例中 ,該値可爲其他數値。可按熱源124(3整個表面上而 連繪地變化,或是可爲根據如上之等式1來供應電力給該 熱源1240的某一或複數個區域。 圖15爲該熱源1240的頂部平視圖,而根據本發明實 施例,該者具有四個電阻熱產生元件1280。在本實施例之 一特點裡,兩個內部電路ί282 (如圖所示之1282a和 1282b)可供應電力給該熱源1240的內部區域1288,而兩 個外部電路1283 (如圖所示之1283a和1283b)可供應電力 給該熱源1240的外部區域1287。在本實施例之一特點裡 ,諸電路1282、1283可涵蓋該熱源1240近約67%的表面 面積。而在其他的實施例裡,諸電路1282、1283可涵蓋較 多或略少百分比値的熱源表面面積。 在本實施例之進一步特點裡,諸電路1282、1283各個 可獨立地加以控制,俾改變供應給該熟源1240的電力。另 者,某一或複數個電路可爲倂同耦接至另一電路而爲倂同 所控。例如,內部電路1282可相互耦接,而由某一個別控 48 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 訂ilr-----線 «· 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(,) 制器所控制。在任一實施例中,可組態設定諸電路1282、 1283,以按槪略對應於參酌如前圖14之分析結果的單位面 積速率,來提供熱給該熱源1240。例如,部分的內部電路 1282和外部電路1283可爲沿周緣線而伏設,而各個電子 元件1080的局部則是雙折自行背撐以構成複數個的鄰接周 邊區段。這些周邊區段在外部區域1287內相較於內部區域 1288可彼此較爲近置,藉以增加該熱源1240在單位面積 上所提供的電力。在外部區域1287與內部區域1288兩者 的情況下,鄰接周邊區段之間所相隔的空間可按放射狀朝 外方向而減少,藉以對應於如前所述之電增因數來增加在 單位面積上所得提供的電力。 上述參酌於圖13 - 15所述排設方式之一特性爲,延長 而具有槪屬均勻剖面外型和剖面面積的電阻加熱器,伏伸 於熱源的整個表面上,而在該熱源的不同區域處按不同速 率產生熱。爲此,阻抗加熱器可具有一簡易外型及結構, 而同時也足可處理往返於熱源及微電子工件W之間的熱傳 送速率變化性。例如,在一實施例中,該熱源1240可加熱 該微電子工件W至穩定溫度攝氏285度,而橫跨於該微電 子工件W表面上的變化性可約爲由攝氏3度到攝氏4度。 而在其他實施例中,該熱源可提供提供其他的穩態溫度而 具其他溫度變化性。例如,在一實施例中,該熱源1240可 將該微電子工件W在約10秒內從約攝氏25度加熱至攝氏 25〇度。而又在另一實施例中,該熱源1240可包括具有除 延長帶狀外之組態的加熱元件。例如,該熱源1240可含有 49 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) .1.-----------·-裝--- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂· 丨線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明) 一薄膜型加熱器。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 圖16爲如前圖13和15所述,可提供電力給電子元件 1080、1280之電子連接器的邊側剖視圖。在該實施例之一 特點中,各個連接器1084包括一接合於彼些電子元件 1080、1280之諸接觸襯墊1081某者的熱灼接觸表面1085 。在一實施例中,該接觸表面1085可包含一可爲相當良好 傳電性和相當良好傳熱的材質。這種材質可如鎳/鐵合金, 如美國新澤西洲Franklin Lakes的Ed Fagen公司所出售之 「合金42」。在該實施例之進一步特點中,該接觸表面可 鍍覆一 100微英吋厚度的鎳質層和100微英吋厚度的金質 層,並按銅鋅焊接於該熱源1040的接觸襯墊1081 (如圖 13)。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 該連接器1084可進一步包括一延展而離於該接觸表面 1085,並經組態設定以耦接到一接附於電力源(未以圖示) 之導線1089的排通口 1086。在該實施例之又進一步特點 中,該排通口 1086的形狀可爲選定以移補通透於該連接器 1084的導體熱損。例如該排通口 1086在該接觸表面1085 與該導線1089之間的區域裡可具有較小的直徑,而這可於 局部上增加該連接器1084的電阻性並造成該連接器1084 在該區域裡增熱。在該區域裡所產生的電阻熱可彌補因該 連接器1084所致之導體熱損失。 圖17爲參酌前圖10所述之諸工件支架1070的上視等 構圖。在該實施例之一特點中,諸工件支架1070包括一支 撐柱1071和一支撐卡夾1073。該支撐柱1071可包括一角 50 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(J) 栓1072,可由該支撐卡夾1073的凹槽1074所滑動接執。 該支撐卡夾1073可進一步包括支指1075,足得放射狀地 向內延展以支撐該微電子工件W (如圖10所示)。眾多工 件支架1070係經圓周排列以環繞於該熱源1040 (如圖10 所示),而諸支指1075放射狀地向內延展於該熱源1040之 上,以於該熱源1040上支撐住該微電子工件W。各個工 件支架1070可包括一接合表面1076,而當室蓋1020 (如 圖10所示)向下移動至其關閉位置時,可該者接合於該室 蓋1020。對此,該室蓋1020可向下移動該支撐卡夾1073 與該微電子工件W,直到該微電子工件W接合於該熱源 1040並且關閉室蓋1020。內部彈簧1077可將各個工件支 架1070偏離向上,以當開啓室蓋1020時,可將該微電子 工件W卸離於該熱源1040。而在該室蓋1020觸抵其全開 位置之前,停止組件(未於圖7中繪示)可阻停該支撐卡夾 1073的向上彈旅,以於安裝與移除該工件W過程中,得 維供該微電子工件W與該室蓋1020低部表面之間的淨空 情況。 圖18爲如前按圖10所述之第二排熱槽1050某實施例 的部分爆出、上視等構圖。在該實施例之一特點中,該第 二排熱槽1050可包括一流體供應機埠1052與一回返機埠 1053,而各者耦接於冷卻通道1054。該冷卻通道1054最 先會具有一開放之上部表面,而當排熱槽覆帽1051接附到 該第二排熱槽1050時即爲封閉狀態。對此,可透經該流體 供應機埠1052來供應冷卻液給該冷卻通道1054 ’並經該 51 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) I.----------裝---- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂——„------線 « 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(力) 回返機璋1053而排離於該第二排熱槽1〇50。在一實施例 中,流經該第二排熱槽1050內冷卻通道1054之冷卻液的 路徑,會因出現連接通道l〇28a、l〇28b及/或l〇28c所中 斷。爲此,該冷卻通道1054可繞途向下進入位於排熱槽覆 帽1051內的耦接通道1055,然後返回至冷卻通道1054, 以完成從該供應機埠1052到回返機埠1053的流路。 如前圖10- 18所述之裝置1〇〇〇實施例作業現如下按 圖1〇加以詳釋。上部室體l〇〇3a的作業可與低部室體 1003b的作業相互獨立。爲此,無論是上部室體1003a或 低部室體1003b,該室蓋1020最初是會被移以昇起或開啓 位置,即如圖10所示。該室體體積1008會被流率相對爲 低之惰性氣體,如N2,加以淨除,該者會透過除淨流體機 埠1023而流經除淨流體流道1022。熱源1040可爲閒置於 約爲攝氏50度的平均溫度。另者,該熱源1040可爲關閉 或未啓動狀態,而在另一替代實施例中,該熱源1040可爲 完全開啓狀態。而又在進一步的替代實施例裡,該熱源 1040可爲閒置於攝氏50度以外的溫度處。在上述任一實 施例之中,該第一排熱槽1060可爲背置於該第二排熱槽 1050,以冷卻該第一排熱槽1060。 ‘接著,藉由機械傳送機制,將微電子工件W移入(在 一實施例中,其施用材質乙側係爲朝上者)該開放室體內。 該傳送機制將該微電子工件W置妥於工件支架1〇7〇上後 即行抽離。然後將室蓋1020向下移動置關閉位置.,而與此 同時,可接合該些工件支架1070,並將彼等向下移動直到 52 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 1· (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝--------訂---^------線j 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(θ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 工件w接合至熱源1040。然後再經由真空機埠1042對真 空孔洞1041施加真空狀態,以汲引該工件W緊密地熱接 合於該熱源1040。可在該項室蓋關密作業之前、之中或之 後施加真空狀態。接著,流往室體體積1008的處理氣體流 會被替代爲淨除流體(如每分鐘1到10公升的N2、Ar、Η2 或He2)。當按高於某流率而供應處理氣體時,裝置1000 可包括一質流控制器及/或多機埠流閥摺面,以選擇性地控 制進入該室體體積1008內的氣流。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 接下來,啓動該熱源1040以加熱該微電子工件W至 某既選溫度而維持一段既定時間。例如,當該微電子工件 W包括一銅質層時,該工件W可被加熱到溫度範圍約攝氏 210度到290度並維持約30秒到約90秒。在某特定範例 中,該銅質層可被加熱到約攝氏250度而約持續60秒。按 此,該銅質層可加以退火,使得該薄層的晶粒結構爲之改 變(如構成該薄層之晶粒尺寸增加)。而在其他的實施例中 ,可根據該製程之標定材質的化學成分,並依預期該製程 所得獲致的結果,將該工件W按照其他長度的時段而加熱 至其他溫度。例如,在某一實施例中,裝置1000可爲組態 設定以按約達攝氏45〇度的溫度來處理該微電子工件,俾 對其銅質層進行退火,即如顆紋線路、通道及/或薄膜者。 而在其他的實施例裡,該裝置可執行其他的低溫程序,像 是他種金屬的退火作業、重導焊劑及/或烘烤光阻層等。在 任一者實施例中,開始由閒置溫度昇溫可在該室蓋關閉作 業之前、期間或是之後進行。可利用閉路溫度感測器回饋 53 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(<\) 控制,像是正比積分控制、正比積分導數控制或多變數溫 度控制等,來控制由閒置溫度增加溫度到目標處理溫度。 在該微電子工件w確已加熱後,該第一排熱槽1060 會向上移動而接合於該熱源1040的低部表面,以冷卻該熱 源1040和該微電子工件w。然後透過真空機埠1065來施 承真空狀態給該真空供應通道1062’俾吸汲該第一排熱槽 1060而緊密熱接合於該熱源1〇40。在一實施例中,該微電 子工件W可於18秒內被冷卻至某個低於攝氏70度的溫度 。接著以淨除氣體來替代處理氣體流。當冷卻階段完成後 ,該第一排熱槽1060會向下移動而接合於該第二排熱槽 1050以冷卻該第一排熱槽1060。同時,室蓋1050 (1020?) 會昇起以打開室體1〇〇3,並且會將傳送機制620移入該開 放室體內而接合於該微電子工件W,然後將其取出以供進 一步處理。該第二排熱槽1050會在與該第一排熱槽1060 接觸的過程中或之後,藉提供至冷卻通道1054的冷卻流體 加以冷卻。 如上參酌於圖10- 18所述之裝置1000實施例的一項 優點是比者可爲模組化架構。按此,可堆疊,依下而上, 任意數量的室體1003,藉以減少諸室體佔據的空間循跡。 這些室體亦可加以整合而疊置,使得上層室體的底部部分 可定義出其下室體的上部部分。如上參酌於圖10- 18所述 之裝置1000實施例的另一項特點是熱源1040與第二排熱 槽1050並不需要相對於該裝置的其他部分而移動。代之者 ,該第一排熱槽1060和該微電子工件W可相對於該熱源 54 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) T裝--- 訂·! ^------線; 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明( 1040而移動,俾傳送熱往返於該微電子工件W。這項特性 的一項優點是,相較於某些傳統式配置方式而言,確可減 少用以提供電力、除淨流體傳通與真空傳通給諸移動配件 的可移動耦接機具之數量。而該裝置1000實施例特性的又 一項優點,在於該熱源1040具有低的熱質量,並被放置在 高於排熱槽1050、1060處。爲此,熱源(並因而該工件W) 可相當快速地冷卻,並且任何因該熱源1040所加熱的氣體 會傾向於昇離(而非朝向)該些排熱槽1050、1060處。這種 配置方式的一項優點爲可快速地加熱與冷卻該工件,而相 較於傳統裝置確可提高裝置的產出量。 在其他實施例中,該裝置1000可具有其他的組態。例 如’由該熱源1040所供應的熱可提供給除了電子元件 1080以外的裝置。提供給該第二排熱槽1050的冷卻效果 ’可由除了冷性流體以外的機制所提供。移動該室蓋1020 與該第一排熱槽1060的啓動器,可由除了氣動裝置以外的 裝置而爲電力驅動。該裝置1000 (及/或除前文參酌於圖 2A- 18所述之熱傳送裝置以外)可經組態設定,而執行除 退火以外的熱處理製程。例如,該些裝置可加熱該微電子 工件W俾重導該微電子工件w表面上的焊劑、修癒或烘 烤該微電子工件W上的光阻層,及/或執行其他肇因於及/ 或要求高溫而得受惠的各項程序。該裝置的熱源可藉由直 接接觸於該工件、及/或透過中介氣體或液體所傳導、及/ 或透過中介氣體或液體所對流的方式,來傳導加熱該微電 子工件。該熱源與該工件支架可爲彼此相對而固定,或是 55 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) —·----------裝------ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂---"-- 線 0 495885 A7 B7 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 五、發明說明(5)) 該熱源與該工件其一或兩者皆可彼此相互移動。該第一排 熱槽得爲相對於該熱源和該第二排熱槽而可移動,或是另 外這些組成元件可爲彼此固定,而得選擇性地藉由在該熱 源與該第一排熱槽、及/或在該第一排熱槽與該第二排熱槽 間引入某流體媒介,俾以加熱或冷卻該工件。 圖19爲根據本發明另一實施例,用以熱處理某微電子 工件之裝置1900某局部的部份略示、剖面側視圖。在一實 施例中,該裝置1900可包括兩個熱處理室體1903 (即圖中 爲上部室體1903a和低部室體1903b)。各個室體1903可 具有一基座1910,以及一移動朝向與遠離該基座1910俾 關閉與開啓該室體1003的室蓋1920。工件W (如圖10所 示)可由位於室蓋1920與熱源1940之間的室體1903所支 撐。該工件W可由複數個大致類似於前文參酌圖10與Π 而討論之工件支架所支稱,藉以選擇性地將該工件W接合 於熱源1940。該熱源1940可相對於該基座1910而由複數 個熱源支架1944所支撐。在一實施例中,該熱源1940可 具有大致類似於如圖11或12所示之組態,而在另外的實 施例裡,該熱源1940可具有他款組態。 在如圖19實施例之一特點裡,該裝置1900可包括一 第一排熱槽部分I960,固定附接於一第二排熱槽部分1950 以定義出某一排熱槽1990。該裝置1900可進一步包括一 排熱槽啓動器1961,可將該排熱槽1990移動於該排熱槽 1990卸離自該熱源1940之卸離位置(如圖19所示),與該 第一排熱槽部分I960接合到該熱源1940低部表面的接合 56 (請先閱讀背面之注音心事項再填寫本頁} 裝---- 訂: :------參 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 _____ B7 五、發明說明(<\ ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 位置之間。例如,該排熱槽啓動器1961可包括一個耦接於 啓動器供應流道1966的風箱啓動器,可供應加壓流體(如 空氣)以驅動該啓動器昇起及降下。而在實施例之進一步特 點中,該第二排熱槽部分1950可包括一具有面朝向上的開 口 1955的冷卻通道1954。該第二排熱槽部分1950可藉綁 定器(未以圖示)而直接接附到該第一排熱槽1960,使得該 冷卻通道1954內的流體會直接接合到該第一排熱槽部分 1960的低部表面。一置放在該第一排熱槽部分i960與該 第二排熱槽部分1950之間的〇型環部分1956,可防止冷 卻流體透過這兩個排熱槽部分的介面而逃逸。另者,該排 熱槽1990可按一整合、單件式單元所構成。 該第一排熱槽部分1960、第二排熱槽部分1950與排 熱槽啓動器1961可包括根據所預期之作業溫度範圍與熱傳 送速率而選定的各種材質。例如,在一實施例中,該排熱 槽部分I960、1950可包括銅質,而該排熱槽啓動器1961 可包括鐵伏龍(Teflon™)。而在其他的實施例中,這些元件 可包含其他材質。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 而又在本裝置1900實施例之進一步特點中,該排熱槽 1990可包括一耦接於眾多放射狀真空通道1963的真空供 應流道1962,以槪如前文參酌圖10所述之方式,將該排 熱槽1990汲引進入而緊密熱接觸於該熱源1940。該基底 1910可包括一耦接於摺面1927的淨除流體流道1922,以 槪如前文參酌圖10所述之方式,透過淨除流體孔洞1924 來遞送淨除流體。該基底1910也可包括一室蓋啓動器 57 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(β) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 1921,並亦按槪如前文參酌圖1〇所述之方式’向上與向下 移動該室蓋1920。該上部室體1903a可包括一機蓋1930 以保護該裝置1900。 圖20爲如前參酌於圖19所述之第一排熱槽部分1960 與第二排熱槽部分1950實施例的部分爆出、上視等構圖。 在本實施例之一特點中,該第一排熱槽部分1960可包括一 圓環狀的真空通道1964,按流體傳通於複數個放射狀的真 空通道1963,以增加該排熱槽1990與該熱源1940之間的 真空吸力(如圖19)。該第一排熱槽部分I960亦可包括淨空 凹洞1978 (如圖19),按槪如前文參酌圖1〇到17所述之方 式來容納工件支架。該第二排熱槽部分1950可包括一冷卻 供應線路1958以供應冷卻流體(如水質)給冷卻通道1954 的進入機璋1957a。而在該流體確已流通該第二排熱槽部 分1950之後,一冷卻離出線路1959可從該冷卻通道1954 的離出機埠1957b抽出該冷卻流體。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 圖21爲根據本發明實施例之基座1910等構圖。即如 圖21所示,真空供應流道1962可延伸至該基座1910的中 央處,以提供真空給該第一排熱槽部分I960 (如圖19)。啓 動器供應過道1966可放射狀地向內延展以供應加壓流體給 環狀的排熱槽啓動器1961,即如圖21所略示者。 如上參酌圖19 _ 21所述裝置1900實施例之一特點爲 該第一與第二排熱槽部分i960、1950可爲彼此固定接附。 而這種特性的優點是,供應給第二排熱槽部分1950的冷卻 流體,可藉進入與該第一排熱槽部分I960直接的熱接觸, 58 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(β) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 而直接地冷卻該第一排熱槽部分I960。這項特性的進一步 優點是冷卻流體可冷卻該第一排熱槽部分I960,同時該第 一排熱槽接合於該熱源1940 °按此’相較於其他配置方式 ,該第一排熱槽部分1960可更爲快速地及/或更完整地冷 卻該熱源1940。 圖22爲又根據本發明另一實施例,用以熱處理某微電 子工件的裝置2200之部分略示、剖面側視圖。在該實施例 之一特點裡,該裝置2200可包括兩個熱處理室體2003, 如圖22中繪示爲接附於機蓋2230的上部室體2203a,和 位於該上部室體2203a下方的低部室體2203b。各個室體 2203可具有一基座2210、室蓋2220,以及一可相對於該 基座2210而移動該室蓋2220的室蓋啓動器2221。熱源 1940可如大致類似於前述方式,位於各個室體2203的室 蓋2220與基座2210之間。該基座2210可包括一淨除流體 流道2222,一摺面2227和一淨除流體孔洞2224,以大致 如前述之方式而淨除各個室體2203內的體積。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 這項實施例進一步特點中,各個室體2203可包括一排 熱槽2260,該者可相對於基座2210而移動。按此,各個 室體2203可包括一排熱槽啓動器2261,像是風箱啓動器 ,可相對於基座2210而向上和向下移動該排熱槽2260。 而在本實施例的進一步特點中,可藉透過啓動器供應過道 2266供應到該排熱槽啓動器2261的可擴充體積2264內之 冷卻流體,來啓動該排熱槽啓動器2261。在本實施例之一 特點中,冷卻流體可從該排熱槽啓動器2261前進到離出過 59 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明) 道(在圖22中非屬可見者)。按此,啓動該排熱槽啓動器 2261的流體也可進入與該排熱槽2260的直接熱接觸,以 冷卻該排熱槽2260。該流體可爲液體,像是水或冷凍劑。 另者,該流體可爲氣體。 而在該實施例的進一步特點中,該基座2210可包括一 與該基座2210所整合建構之輔助性排熱槽2250。啓動器 供應過道2266可具有通透於該輔助性排熱槽225〇的迴旋 路徑,以冷卻該輔助性排熱槽2250。或另外,可於該輔助 性排熱槽2250內供置個別的冷卻過道’以獨立於該排熱槽 2260之外的方式,來冷卻該輔助性排熱槽2250。在任一實 施例中,裝置2200可包括耦接於啓動器供應過道2266的 機閥,以獨立地控制通過該啓動器供應過道2266而前往該 排熱槽啓動器2261的流體壓力和流率。按此,可增加或減 少流體流率以控制該排熱槽2260 (或視需要連帶該輔助性 排熱槽2250)冷卻的速率,而流體壓力可獨立地增減,以 控制該排熱槽啓動器2261和的該排熱槽2260移動情況。 如上參酌圖22所述之裝置2200的一項特點是,可使 用相同的流體於啓動該排熱槽啓動器2261和冷卻該排熱槽 2260 (或視需要連帶該輔助性排熱槽225〇)。按此’相較於 其他會對啓動器啓動作業與排熱槽冷卻而要求個別流體來 源的各種裝置,確可簡化該裝置2200。另一項優點是(如 當比較於如按前圖19 - 21所述之裝置1900實施例),可按 某固定進入點(如啓動器2261的基座),而非移動性進入點 (如圖20的進入機填1957a) ’來供應冷卻流體。·另一項優 60 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝--------訂----------線. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A7 B7 五、發明說明(Μ ) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 點是,在狹限體積內,比起該第一排熱槽2060 (如圖20)而 言,該排熱槽2260的質量可爲較大。按此,如圖22所述 之排熱槽2260實施例,可比起其他的排熱槽具有更均勻的 溫度分布效果。 前述參酌於圖2Α- 22的各種熱處理室體任者皆可與 濕性化學處理機具相互整合,該者足可,而特別是,進行 如銅質之金屬電子化學沉積作業。某款這種處理機具可爲 LT - 210™電鍍裝置,由美國蒙大拿州KalispeU市的 Semitool公司所出售。圖23和24說明這種整合方式的實 施例。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 圖23中說明系統2300實施例,包括眾多處理站台或 室體2310 (如圖23所略示)。在一實施例中,這些處理站 台包括某一或複數個浸濕/乾燥站台室體2310a,以及某一 或複數個電鍍站台或室體2310b。這些鍍層室體2310b可 包括熟捻於本項技藝之人士所廣知的某一或複數個電鍍反 應器。可參酌如下諸款反應器:美國專利5,985,126國際 申請案件PCT/US99/15430 (刊爲WO 00/03067),國際申請 案件PCT/US00/10120 (刊爲WO 00/61498),以及國際申請 案件PCT/US00/10210 (刊爲WO 00/61837),茲將彼等各者 按其整體倂合爲本參考文獻。在其他實施例中,系統2300 可包括其他的濕性化學處理站台。另者,諸處理站台或應 用室體可對工件W施予蝕刻劑、浸濕性流體、燥化性流體 (如空氣),及/或藉由像是電鍍、無電式鎪層、電子化學沉 積、物理氣相沉積(PVD)及/或化學氣相沉積(CVD)等方式 61 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A7 B7 五、發明說明(1) 所構成的鍍層或薄層。執行這些功能的室體亦屬熟捻於本 項技藝之人士所眾知者。 系統2300也可包括某一或複數個熱處理室體2315 (像 是,但不限於,某退火室體)。這些熱處理室體2315可包 括至少一個根據如前某一或複數個實施例所建構的熱反應 器,以對各個工件執行退火程序或另外的熱處理。可藉由 某一或複數個經置放以沿著中央軌線2325而按線性方式移 動之機械傳送機制2320,將這些工件被傳送於處理站台 2310與熱處理室體2315間。 在該實施例之一特點,該機械傳送機制2320可獨立操 作,以移動諸微電子工件於各處理或應用室體231〇和熱處 理室體2315任者之間。而在該實施例之進一步特點,該機 械傳送機制2320可於室體間一次傳送一項工件。或另者, 各個機械傳送機制2320可一次傳送多個工件。在任一實施 例中’系統2300可在單一整合承體中支撐複數個室體,按 此提供一種單一包封環境,而諸室體與傳送機制足可運作 於其內。 在一實施例中,微電子工件可經由輸入/輸出區域 2312而進入該系統2300內。該傳送機制2320移置各個工 件到諸鍍層室體2310b之某者,其中會對工件上預存之種 源層施以一毯覆層。該傳送機制2320接著將各個工件移到 浸濕/乾燥站台室體2310a,在此該工件會被按斜角蝕刻、 潔淨(前端與後端)與旋乾。該工件可保持爲單塊上,而此 時可完成該浸濕/乾燥站台室體2310a所有的製程。該傳送 62 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention) Vertically move the chambers 1003. In a further feature of this embodiment, the chamber bodies 1003 may have a modular structure. For example, the lid 1020 of the lower chamber body 1003b may be based on the base 1010 which may also be integrated with the upper chamber body 1003a. The cover 1020 of the upper chamber 1003a can be supported by the cover 1030. In this way, any number of chambers 1003 can be stacked on each other in this way. By integrating the characteristics of a certain chamber and the chambers above it, the total number of components of the device 1000 can be reduced. This arrangement can also reduce the space tracking required for multiple chambers. At the same time, this configuration can provide the flexibility of a modular architecture. In another embodiment, the device 1000 may have other modular configuration modes, that is, those arranged in a side-by-side manner. The cover 1020 of each of the room bodies 1003 may be coupled to the cover starter 1021 to move downward from the open position (as shown in FIG. 10) to a closed position. The lid starter 1021 of the upper compartment 1003a may be attached to the cover 1030, and the lid starter 1021 of the lower compartment 1003b may be a base attached to the upper compartment 1003a. Block 1010. Each cover starter 1021 may include an air-actuated bellows, and the cover 1020 may be moved downward when inflated. In one feature of the present invention, each bellows can extend 360 ° to the periphery to form a closed ring. In addition, a plurality of bellows or other starters can be placed on the cover 1020 by a spaced-apart ring. In any embodiment, when the air pressure in the bellows is released, one or more springs (not shown) can return the cover 1020 to the open (upper) position. When the chamber cover 1020 is in the closed position, the chamber cover 1020 and the base 1010 can define a volume of the chamber body 1008 that surrounds the microelectronic workpiece W. 41 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications ( 210 X 297 mm) ------------ install -------- order --- «------ line (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this Page) «495885 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (q) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page). That is, as shown in Fig. 2B according to the reference, it is advantageous that the area surrounding the microelectronic workpiece W can be removed during the annealing process. Therefore, the chamber cover 1020 may include a decontamination fluid flow channel 1022, and the decontamination fluid (such as nitrogen) is transferred to the chamber body volume 1008 through the folded surface 1027. The folded surface 1027 is aligned with the cleaning fluid diffusion plate 1025, and the cloth is perforated with a cleaning fluid hole 1024 which can be directly guided into the volume 1008 of the chamber body. The flow passage 1022 can also be coupled to the fluid removal machine port 1023 by connecting the passage 1028a. The cleaning fluid port 1023 can be connected to a cleaning fluid source (not shown). In one embodiment, the fluid removal port 1023 of the upper chamber 1003a may be located in the cover 1030, and the fluid removal port 1023 of the lower chamber 1003b may be located at the base of the upper chamber 1003a. Within 1010. The connecting passageway 1028a of the two chamber bodies 1003 can be extended outward along the sides, and the fluid removal machine 璋 1023 coupled to the external surface of the device 1000 can be extended upward to avoid interference with the annular cover starter 1021. The decontamination fluid can exit the opening 1026 through the decontamination fluid on the external surface of the device 1000 and be discharged from the chamber volume 1008. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs During the high temperature process of the annealing process, the microelectronic workpiece W can be joined to the heat source 1040. To this end, the upper surface of the heat source 1040 includes a solid material that can transfer heat to the microelectronic workpiece by conduction. The heat source 1040 may also include a vacuum hole 1041 coupled to a vacuum source (not shown), which will be described in detail later. During the heating process, the microelectronic workpiece W must be drawn close to maintain the heat source 1040. Tightly connected state. For example, the heat source 1040 may be supported by a plurality of heat source brackets 1044 relative to the base 1010, at least one of which contains a fluid flow communicating with the vacuum hole 1041 42 The paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention ( <) of the vacuum aisle 1043 (shown in the lower chamber body 003b). The vacuum aisle 1043 may also be connected (via a connecting aisle i28b) to a heater vacuum machine 璋 1042 of the external surface of the device, which is said to be connected to the vacuum source. In the cooling part of the annealing process, the first row of heat sinks 1060 can be raised to engage the heat source 1040, and both the heat source 1040 and the microelectronic workpiece W can be cooled by the conduction effect. According to this, the first row of heat sinks 106 () may be coupled to a row of heat sink starters 1061, who may move the first row of heat sinks 1060 upward to engage the heat source 1040. In one embodiment, the heat exhaust tank starter 1061 may include a gas-driven bellows, similar to the aforementioned chamber cover starter 1021. Or on the other hand, the heat sink starter 1061 can have other configurations. The first heat sink 1060 can be moved upward to engage the heat source 1040, and moved downward to be detached from the heat source 10. 40. In a further feature of this embodiment, the first row of heat sinks 1060 may include a vacuum supply channel 1062, which is connected (via a connecting aisle 1028c) to a vacuum port 1065 of an external surface of the device 1000. The vacuum supply channel 1062 is coupled to one or more radial vacuum channels 1063 and one or more ring-shaped vacuum channels 1064 in the upper surface of the first row of heat sinks 1060, so as to serve as the heat source 1040. When the first row of heat sinks 1060 are connected to each other, the first row of heat sinks 1060 can be drawn and brought into close thermal contact with the heat source 1040. The upper surface of the first row of heat sinks 1060 may also include a compressible, conductive thermal pad 1066, which has a joint surface 1067, and when the first row of heat sinks 1060 is in its raised position At this time, close thermal contact with the heat source 1040 is available. In another feature of this embodiment, the lower surface of the first row of heat sinks 1060 may include a compressible, 43 paper size applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) i ·- -------- «-Equipment (please read the note on the back before filling in this page) Order ——- I ------ line« Printed Economy Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Ministry of Intellectual Property Bureau 495885 A7 __________----- V. Description of the Invention (〇Λ) A thermal pad that is conductive and resembles the pad 1066 to improve heat dissipation with the second row Thermal contact between the slots 1050. In one embodiment, the first row of heat sinks 1060 has no active cooling elements. According to this, the advantage of this configuration is that there will be no cooling fluid supply line connected to the first row of heat sinks 1060, which can eliminate the design of the fluid coupling connected to a movable heat sink Complexity. Instead, when the first row of heat sinks 1060 is detached from the heat source 1040 and joined to the second row of heat sinks 1050, the second row of heat sinks 1050 can operate for cooling and must cool the first row Hot slot 1060. According to this, the second row of heat sinks 1050 may include a cooling channel 1054 coupled to the cooling fluid supply port and the return port, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 18. The second row of heat sinks 1050 may include a cooling module cover 1051 to seal and partially define the cooling channel 1054, which will also be described in detail with reference to FIG. 18 in the text. In other embodiments, in addition to cooling the second row of heat sinks 1050, the first row of heat sinks 1060 (such as by a cooling fluid) may be used for operation cooling. This configuration can speed up the cooling speed of the first row of heat sinks 1060 (and / or the heat source 1040 and the workpiece W). This is because when the first row of heat sinks 1060 is fed to the heat source Γ040, it can be cooled. The first row of heat sinks 1060. FIG. 11 is a partial burst and isometric view of the heat source 1040 embodiment of FIG. In one feature of this embodiment, the heat source 1040 may include three ceramic plates 1046, as shown in FIG. 11 as an upper ceramic plate 1046a, a middle ceramic plate 1046b, and a bottom ceramic plate 1046c. The upper ceramic plate 1046a includes a drawable microelectronic workpiece W (as shown in Fig. 10) and a 44-diameter paper. Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) " -I .------- --- • Installation ---- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Order—— · ------ Wire «495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (AV) Dense heat bonding to the heat source A vacuum hole 1041 of 1040. The middle-layer ceramic flat plate 1046b includes a vacuum channel 1047 that can provide a fluid flow function between the vacuum hole 1041 and the heater vacuum machine 1042 (see FIG. 10). At least one of the vacuum channels 1047 will include the coupling port 1045 of the vacuum channel 1043 (see FIG. 10) aligned with the heat source bracket ι04. The bottom ceramic plate 1046c includes a calibration angle pin 1049 that can be extended upward, and penetrates the corresponding calibration holes 1048 in the middle ceramic plate 1046b and the upper ceramic plate 1046a, so that the three ceramic plates HM6 can be mutually Qi Zhun. The electronic connector 1084 can bond an electronic component to the lower surface of the underlying ceramic flat plate 1046c, that is, as described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 13 and 16. FIG. 12 is a partial top view isometric view of a heat source 1140 according to another embodiment of the present invention. In one feature of this embodiment, the heat source 1140 includes a single ceramic plate Π46, which has a plurality of vacuum channels 1147 directly formed in the upper surface of the single ceramic plate 1146. At least one of the vacuum channels 1147 includes a channel cover 1139. One end of the vacuum channel 1147 can define a coupling port 1145, which is configured to be aligned with the vacuum channel 1043 described in FIG. 10 above. The channel cover 1139 may further include a bottom surface having a vacuum groove 1138, and the concave structure may provide fluid flow between the coupling port 1145 and the vacuum channels Π47. The vacuum channels 1147 are directly exposed to the facing surfaces of the microelectronic workpiece W downward to draw the workpiece W to be connected to the heat source 1140. . For this reason, one of the characteristics of the heat source 1H0 described in the previous FIG. 12 is that the other can be made of a single ceramic plate 1146 without the need for multiple plates. One of this configuration method 45 paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) "Installation -------- 1T ---.------ Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (岣) The advantage is that it can reduce production costs. And increase the reliability of the heat source 1140. In the case of referring to the embodiments of any of the heat sources 1040 and 1140 of Figs. 11 and 12, the heat source may further include a heat generator. For example, as shown in Fig. 13, An electronic component 1080 is directly attached to and / or integrated into the lower surface of the heat source 104 (Γ. For this reason, the electronic component 1080 may be more efficient than some conventional systems The power source 1040 supplies power to the heat source 1040, and can be more easily stripped from the heat source 1040. In one feature of this embodiment, the electronic component 1080 may include an internal area 1088 and Various circuits in the outer region 1087. One feature of this embodiment is In this case, two internal circuits 1082 may provide power to the internal area 1088, and two external circuits 1083 may provide power to the external area 1087. Each of the circuits 1082 and 1083 may include two contact pads for coupling to a power source. Pad 1081, which is further detailed as referenced in Figure 16. In this regard, the electronic component 1080 can be tailored to be responsible for or due to a locality of the microelectronic workpiece W (and the heat source 1040) compared with other parts. This is a different heating rate requirement. For example, when the heat loss at the peripheral area of the microelectronic workpiece W is greater than the heat loss at the interior of the microelectronic workpiece W, the external area 1087 of the electronic component 1080 may be provided in It is a large amount of electricity to average the expected heat loss. In other embodiments, the electronic component 1080 (or other heat generating device) can be customized according to the heat source 1040 and / or the micro The heat transfer characteristics of the electronic workpiece W provide a differential or uniform heating method for the microelectronic workpiece W. Fig. 14 is a top plan view of the heat source 1240, and the results of the thermal analysis measured on the upper surface of the heat source 1240 The heat 1240. Placement 46 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Binding · 495885 A7 A_B7____ V. Description of the invention (VV) is connected to the side wall 1281 of the room body, and includes an inner area 1288 and an outer area 1287. The heat source 1240 may further include a cell 1249 to accommodate the workpiece support 1070 (as shown in FIG. 10). An embodiment of the heat source 1240 The thermal analysis results (where the microelectronic workpiece W is placed on the heat source 1240) indicate that power can be provided at different rates per unit area of the heat source 1240 to uniformly heat the microelectronic workpiece W. For example, the outer area 1287 may include a central portion 1287a, peripheral areas 1287b on each side of the central portion 1287a, and a contact area 1287c adjacent to the heat source 1240 contact pad. In one embodiment, the electric power per unit area supplied to the peripheral area 1287b may be about 90% of the electric power per unit area supplied to the central portion 1287a. When the heat source 1240 includes a resistive electronic component, the electric power may be provided according to the item, or the electric power is provided by other sources. In either embodiment, the power may be proportional to the rate of heat supplied to the heat source 1240, or the rate of heat transferred to the microelectronic workpiece W. In addition, the power per unit area available to the contact area 1287c may be about 150% of the power per unit area supplied to the central portion 1287a. In other embodiments, the difference type of the relative power 値 supplied to each region 1287a to 1287c may be determined according to the specific characteristics of the heat source 1240 and the microelectronic workpiece W connected to the heat source 1240, for example. In one embodiment, the power supplied per unit area may be changed according to a function of the distance at point C in the heat source 1240. For example, the electric power per unit area can be increased in a radial direction outward, so that the external edge electric power of the heat source 1240 is about 7.5% higher than the electric power per unit area at the midpoint C of the heat source 1240. According to this, any local position on the heat source 1240 is 47. The paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page). Install the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by the employee consumer cooperative 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention) The installed power can be given by: [1] ^ local = P center 1 + where P / πα / = local power per unit area ^ center = supplied to Electricity per unit area at the center of the heat source a = Electricity increase factor (such as 7.5%) r = Local radius R = Radius of the periphery of the heat source Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economics In one embodiment, the α may be 7.5%, In other embodiments, the frame may be other frames. The heat source 124 (3) can be continuously changed across the entire surface, or it can be used to supply power to one or more areas of the heat source 1240 according to Equation 1 above. FIG. 15 is a top plan view of the heat source 1240 According to the embodiment of the present invention, the latter has four resistance heat generating elements 1280. In one feature of this embodiment, two internal circuits 282 (1282a and 1282b shown in the figure) can supply power to the heat source 1240 The internal area 1288 of the device, and two external circuits 1283 (shown as 1283a and 1283b) can supply power to the external area 1287 of the heat source 1240. In one feature of this embodiment, the circuits 1282 and 1283 can cover the The heat source 1240 is approximately 67% of the surface area. In other embodiments, the circuits 1282, 1283 may cover a greater or lesser percentage of the surface area of the heat source. In a further feature of this embodiment, the circuits 1282, Each of 1283 can be controlled independently to change the power supplied to the mature source 1240. In addition, one or more circuits can be controlled by different coupling to another circuit. For example, internal circuit 1282 Mutual coupling , And controlled by an individual 48 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Binding ilr ----- line «· This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 B7 V. Control of invention (,) controller. In any embodiment, the circuits 1282, 1283 can be configured to correspond to the unit area rate corresponding to the analysis result as shown in FIG. To provide heat to the heat source 1240. For example, some internal circuits 1282 and external circuits 1283 can be laid along the peripheral line, and parts of each electronic component 1080 are double-folded and self-supported to form a plurality of adjacent peripheral areas. These peripheral sections can be closer to each other in the outer area 1287 than the inner area 1288, thereby increasing the power provided by the heat source 1240 per unit area. In the case of both the outer area 1287 and the inner area 1288 The space between adjacent adjacent sections can be reduced in a radial outward direction, so as to increase the power provided on a unit area corresponding to the electricity increase factor as described above. One of the characteristics of the arrangement described in Figs. 13-15 is that the resistance heater is extended and has a uniform cross-sectional shape and cross-sectional area. It extends over the entire surface of the heat source, and is pressed at different areas of the heat source. Heat is generated at different rates. For this reason, the impedance heater can have a simple appearance and structure, and at the same time, it can handle the variability of the heat transfer rate between the heat source and the microelectronic workpiece W. For example, in one embodiment The heat source 1240 can heat the microelectronic workpiece W to a stable temperature of 285 degrees Celsius, and the variability across the surface of the microelectronic workpiece W can be approximately from 3 degrees Celsius to 4 degrees Celsius. In other embodiments, the heat source can provide other steady-state temperatures and other temperature variability. For example, in one embodiment, the heat source 1240 may heat the microelectronic workpiece W from about 25 degrees Celsius to 25 degrees Celsius in about 10 seconds. In yet another embodiment, the heat source 1240 may include a heating element having a configuration other than an extension strip. For example, the heat source 1240 may contain 49 paper sizes that are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) .1 .------------ install --- (please first Read the precautions on the back and fill in this page.) · 丨 line · Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention) A film heater. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page.) Figure 16 is a side cross-sectional view of an electrical connector that can provide power to electronic components 1080 and 1280 as described in Figures 13 and 15 above. In one feature of this embodiment, each connector 1084 includes a hot contact surface 1085 of one of the contact pads 1081 bonded to some of the electronic components 1080, 1280. In one embodiment, the contact surface 1085 may include a material that can have fairly good electrical and thermal conductivity. This material can be, for example, a nickel / iron alloy, such as "Alloy 42" sold by Ed Fagen of Franklin Lakes, New Jersey, USA. In a further feature of this embodiment, the contact surface can be plated with a nickel layer with a thickness of 100 micro-inches and a gold layer with a thickness of 100 micro-inches, and welded to the contact pad 1081 of the heat source 1040 according to copper-zinc. (Figure 13). The connector 1084 printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs may further include an extension separated from the contact surface 1085 and configured to be coupled to a wire attached to a power source (not shown) 1089 的 排 通 口 1086. In still further features of this embodiment, the shape of the row of openings 1086 may be selected to compensate for the heat loss of the conductors that pass through the connector 1084. For example, the exhaust port 1086 may have a smaller diameter in the area between the contact surface 1085 and the wire 1089, and this may locally increase the resistance of the connector 1084 and cause the connector 1084 to be in the area Heat up here. The resistance heat generated in this area can compensate for the heat loss of the conductor caused by the connector 1084. FIG. 17 is a top view and the like of the workpiece holders 1070 described with reference to FIG. 10. In one feature of this embodiment, the workpiece supports 1070 include a support post 1071 and a support clip 1073. The supporting column 1071 may include a corner of 50 paper sizes that are applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm). Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 A7 B7. It can be slidably connected by the groove 1074 of the supporting clip 1073. The supporting clip 1073 may further include a support finger 1075, which is sufficient to extend radially inward to support the microelectronic workpiece W (as shown in FIG. 10). A plurality of workpiece holders 1070 are arranged in a circle to surround the heat source 1040 (as shown in FIG. 10), and the fingers 1075 extend radially inwardly on the heat source 1040 to support the micro source on the heat source 1040. Electronic workpiece W. Each work piece holder 1070 may include an engaging surface 1076, and when the chamber cover 1020 (shown in FIG. 10) is moved down to its closed position, it may be engaged with the chamber cover 1020. In this regard, the chamber cover 1020 can move the support clip 1073 and the microelectronic workpiece W downward until the microelectronic workpiece W engages the heat source 1040 and closes the chamber cover 1020. The internal spring 1077 can deviate each workpiece holder 1070 upward, so that when the chamber cover 1020 is opened, the microelectronic workpiece W can be detached from the heat source 1040. Before the chamber cover 1020 touches its fully open position, the stop assembly (not shown in FIG. 7) can stop the upward spring of the support clip 1073, so that during the installation and removal of the workpiece W, Provides the clearance between the microelectronic workpiece W and the lower surface of the chamber cover 1020. FIG. 18 is a partial burst, top view, etc. composition of a certain embodiment of the second row of heat sinks 1050 as described above with reference to FIG. 10. In one feature of this embodiment, the second row of heat sinks 1050 may include a fluid supply port 1052 and a return port 1053, each of which is coupled to a cooling channel 1054. The cooling channel 1054 will first have an open upper surface, and it will be closed when the heat exhaust tank cap 1051 is attached to the second heat exhaust tank 1050. In this regard, cooling fluid can be supplied through the fluid supply port 1052 to the cooling channel 1054 ', and the 51 paper standards are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) I .--- ------- Installation ---- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Order —— „------ line« 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (force) Return machine 璋1053 and is discharged from the second row of heat sinks 1050. In one embodiment, the path of the cooling liquid flowing through the cooling passage 1054 in the second row of heat sinks 1050 will be connected to the passages 1028a, l 〇28b and / or 1028c interrupted. To this end, the cooling channel 1054 can be detoured into the coupling channel 1055 located in the heat sink cover 1051, and then returned to the cooling channel 1054 to complete the supply from The flow path from port 1052 to return port 1053. The operation of the 1000 embodiment of the device described in Figure 10-18 above is now explained in detail as shown in Figure 10. The operation of the upper chamber 1003a can be related to The operation of the lower chamber body 1003b is independent of each other. For this reason, whether it is the upper chamber body 1003a or the lower chamber body 1003b, the chamber cover 1020 is initially moved to raise or The open position, as shown in Figure 10. The volume of the chamber 1008 will be cleaned by an inert gas with a relatively low flow rate, such as N2, which will pass through the clean fluid port 1023 and pass through the clean fluid flow. Lane 1022. The heat source 1040 may be idle at an average temperature of about 50 degrees Celsius. In addition, the heat source 1040 may be off or not activated, and in another alternative embodiment, the heat source 1040 may be fully on. In yet another alternative embodiment, the heat source 1040 may be idle at a temperature other than 50 degrees Celsius. In any of the above embodiments, the first row of heat sinks 1060 may be placed back to the second row A heat sink 1050 to cool the first row of heat sinks 1060. 'Next, the microelectronic workpiece W is moved into the open chamber (in an embodiment, the application material side B is facing upwards) by a mechanical transfer mechanism. Inside the body. The transfer mechanism pulls the microelectronic workpiece W on the workpiece holder 1070 and pulls it away. Then the chamber cover 1020 is moved down to the closed position. At the same time, the workpiece holder can be engaged. 1070 and move them down to 52 sheets Applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 1 · (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Installation -------- Order --- ^ ---- --Line j Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (θ) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The workpiece w is connected to the heat source 1040. Then it goes through the vacuum port 1042 applies a vacuum state to the vacuum hole 1041 to draw the workpiece W tightly thermally bonded to the heat source 1040. A vacuum can be applied before, during or after the lid closing operation. The process gas flow to chamber volume 1008 is then replaced with a net removal fluid (such as 1 to 10 liters of N2, Ar, Krypton 2 or He2 per minute). When the process gas is supplied at a higher flow rate, the device 1000 may include a mass flow controller and / or a multi-port flow valve flap to selectively control the flow of air into the volume 1008 of the chamber. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Next, the heat source 1040 is activated to heat the microelectronic workpiece to a selected temperature for a predetermined period of time. For example, when the microelectronic workpiece W includes a copper layer, the workpiece W may be heated to a temperature range of about 210 degrees to 290 degrees Celsius and maintained for about 30 seconds to about 90 seconds. In a particular example, the copper layer can be heated to about 250 degrees Celsius for about 60 seconds. According to this, the copper layer can be annealed, so that the grain structure of the thin layer is changed (for example, the grain size of the thin layer is increased). In other embodiments, the workpiece W may be heated to other temperatures according to other lengths of time according to the chemical composition of the calibration material of the process and the results expected from the process. For example, in an embodiment, the device 1000 may be configured to process the microelectronic workpiece at a temperature of about 45 degrees Celsius, and to anneal its copper layer, such as grain lines, channels, and / Or film. In other embodiments, the device can perform other low-temperature procedures, such as annealing of other metals, redirecting flux, and / or baking photoresist layers. In any of the embodiments, the start of the temperature rise from the idle temperature may be performed before, during, or after the lid is closed. Can use closed circuit temperature sensor to feedback 53 This paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention ( < \) control, such as proportional integral control, proportional integral derivative control, or multivariate temperature control, etc., to increase the temperature from the idle temperature to the target processing temperature. After the microelectronic workpiece w is indeed heated, the first row of heat sinks 1060 will move upward to engage the lower surface of the heat source 1040 to cool the heat source 1040 and the microelectronic workpiece w. Then, a vacuum state is applied to the vacuum supply channel 1062 'through the vacuum port 1065, and the first row of heat sinks 1060 are sucked and tightly thermally bonded to the heat source 1040. In one embodiment, the microelectronic workpiece W can be cooled to a temperature lower than 70 degrees Celsius within 18 seconds. The process gas stream is then replaced by a net removal gas. When the cooling stage is completed, the first row of heat sinks 1060 will move downward and engage with the second row of heat sinks 1050 to cool the first row of heat sinks 1060. At the same time, the chamber cover 1050 (1020?) Will be raised to open the chamber body 003, and the transfer mechanism 620 will be moved into the open chamber body to be engaged with the microelectronic workpiece W, and then taken out for further processing. The second row of heat sinks 1050 is cooled by the cooling fluid provided to the cooling channel 1054 during or after being in contact with the first row of heat sinks 1060. An advantage of the device 1000 embodiment described above with reference to FIGS. 10-18 is that it can be a modular architecture. According to this, any number of chambers 1003 can be stacked and bottomed up to reduce the space trace occupied by the chambers. These chambers can also be integrated and stacked so that the bottom portion of the upper chamber can define the upper portion of its lower chamber. Another feature of the embodiment of the device 1000 described above with reference to Figs. 10-18 is that the heat source 1040 and the second row of heat sinks 1050 need not be moved relative to other parts of the device. Instead, the first row of heat sinks 1060 and the microelectronic workpiece W can be relative to the heat source 54 (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) T-Pack --- Order ·! ^ ------ line; printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs This paper is printed in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 B7 5. Description of the invention (1040 while moving, 俾 transfer heat to and from the microelectronic workpiece W. One advantage of this feature is that compared to some traditional configuration methods, it can indeed reduce the use of electricity, In addition to the number of movable coupling tools for clear fluid transfer and vacuum transfer to mobile accessories, another advantage of the feature of the device 1000 embodiment is that the heat source 1040 has a low thermal mass and is placed in a high At the heat removal tanks 1050, 1060. For this reason, the heat source (and thus the workpiece W) can be cooled down relatively quickly, and any gas heated by the heat source 1040 will tend to rise away from (not toward) the heat removal Slots 1050, 1060. One advantage of this configuration is that the workpiece can be heated and cooled quickly, while the throughput of the device can be increased compared to conventional devices. In other embodiments, the device 1000 can have others For example, 'The heat supplied by the heat source 1040 can be provided to devices other than the electronic component 1080. The cooling effect provided to the second heat sink 1050' can be provided by a mechanism other than a cold fluid. Move the chamber The starter of the cover 1020 and the first row of heat sinks 1060 may be electrically driven by a device other than a pneumatic device. The device 1000 (and / or other than the heat transfer device described above with reference to Figures 2A-18) may It is configured to perform a heat treatment process other than annealing. For example, the devices can heat the microelectronic workpiece W, redirect the flux on the surface of the microelectronic workpiece w, repair or bake the microelectronic workpiece W Photoresist layer, and / or perform other procedures that benefit from and / or require high temperatures. The heat source of the device can be conducted by direct contact with the workpiece and / or through an intermediate gas or liquid , And / or through the convection of an intermediary gas or liquid to heat the microelectronic workpiece. The heat source and the workpiece holder can be fixed opposite each other, or 55 paper standards are applicable to Chinese national standards (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 public love) — · ---------- install ------ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Order --- " -Line 0 495885 A7 B7 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 5. Description of the invention (5)) The heat source and the workpiece can move one or both of them. The first row of heat sinks must be movable relative to the heat source and the second row of heat sinks, or in addition, the constituent elements can be fixed to each other, so that the heat can be selectively passed between the heat source and the first row of heat. And / or introducing a fluid medium between the first row of heat sinks and the second row of heat sinks to heat or cool the workpiece. Fig. 19 is a schematic, cross-sectional side view of a portion of a device 1900 for heat treating a microelectronic workpiece according to another embodiment of the present invention. In one embodiment, the apparatus 1900 may include two heat treatment chambers 1903 (i.e., the upper chamber 1903a and the lower chamber 1903b). Each of the chamber bodies 1903 may have a base 1910 and a chamber cover 1920 that moves toward and away from the base 1910, and closes and opens the chamber body 1003. The workpiece W (shown in FIG. 10) may be supported by a chamber body 1903 located between the chamber cover 1920 and the heat source 1940. The workpiece W may be supported by a plurality of workpiece holders which are substantially similar to those discussed above with reference to Figs. 10 and Π, thereby selectively joining the workpiece W to the heat source 1940. The heat source 1940 may be supported by a plurality of heat source brackets 1944 with respect to the base 1910. In one embodiment, the heat source 1940 may have a configuration substantially similar to that shown in Figs. 11 or 12, and in other embodiments, the heat source 1940 may have another configuration. In a feature of the embodiment shown in FIG. 19, the device 1900 may include a first row of heat sink portions I960, which are fixedly attached to a second row of heat sink portions 1950 to define a certain row of heat sinks 1990. The device 1900 may further include a row of heat sink starters 1961, which can move the row of heat sinks 1990 to a position where the row of heat sinks 1990 are detached from the heat source 1940 (as shown in FIG. 19), and the first The heat sink part I960 is joined to the lower surface of the heat source 1940. 56 (Please read the phonetic notes on the back before filling out this page.) Packing ---- Order:: ------ Refer to this paper for China National Standard (CNS) A4 Specification (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 _____ B7 V. Description of Invention ( < \) (Please read the notes on the back before filling out this page). For example, the heat sink starter 1961 may include a bellows starter coupled to the starter supply channel 1966 and may supply pressurized fluid (e.g., air) to drive the starter up and down. In a further feature of the embodiment, the second row of heat sink portions 1950 may include a cooling channel 1954 having an opening 1955 facing upward. The second row of heat sink portions 1950 can be directly attached to the first row of heat sinks 1960 through a binder (not shown), so that the fluid in the cooling channel 1954 can directly join the first row of heat sinks. Part of the lower surface of 1960. An O-ring portion 1956 placed between the first row of heat sink portions i960 and the second row of heat sink portions 1950 prevents the cooling fluid from escaping through the interface between the two rows of heat sink portions. In addition, the heat sink 1990 may be constructed as an integrated, one-piece unit. The first heat sink section 1960, the second heat sink section 1950, and the heat sink starter 1961 may include various materials selected according to the expected operating temperature range and heat transfer rate. For example, in an embodiment, the heat sink slot portions I960 and 1950 may include copper, and the heat sink slot starter 1961 may include Teflon ™. In other embodiments, these elements may include other materials. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and in a further feature of the 1900 embodiment of the device, the heat sink 1990 may include a vacuum supply channel 1962 coupled to a plurality of radial vacuum channels 1963. Referring to the method described in FIG. 10 above, the heat sink 1990 is drawn in and brought into close thermal contact with the heat source 1940. The substrate 1910 may include a net fluid removal channel 1922 coupled to the folding surface 1927, and the net fluid removal is delivered through the net fluid removal hole 1924 in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 10. The base 1910 can also include a cover starter 57. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (β) (Please read the precautions on the back before Fill out this page) 1921, and also 'move the cover 1920 up and down in the manner described above with reference to Fig. 10'. The upper chamber body 1903a may include a cover 1930 to protect the device 1900. FIG. 20 is a partial burst, top view, etc. embodiment of the embodiment of the first row of heat sink portions 1960 and the second row of heat sink portions 1950 described above with reference to FIG. 19. In one feature of this embodiment, the first row of heat sink portions 1960 may include a circular vacuum channel 1964, which is fluidly passed through a plurality of radial vacuum channels 1963 to increase the number of heat sinks 1990 and the Vacuum suction between heat sources 1940 (see Figure 19). The first row of heat sink sections I960 may also include clearance recesses 1978 (as shown in Figure 19) to accommodate the workpiece holders in the manner described above with reference to Figures 10 to 17. The second heat sink portion 1950 may include a cooling supply line 1958 to supply a cooling fluid (such as water) to the inlet unit 1957a of the cooling channel 1954. After the fluid has indeed flowed through the second row of heat sink portions 1950, a cooling exit line 1959 can withdraw the cooling fluid from the exit port 1957b of the cooling channel 1954. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs FIG. 21 is a composition diagram of a base 1910 and the like according to an embodiment of the present invention. That is, as shown in FIG. 21, the vacuum supply flow path 1962 may be extended to the center of the base 1910 to provide a vacuum to the first row of heat sink portions I960 (see FIG. 19). The starter supply aisle 1966 may extend radially inwardly to supply pressurized fluid to the annular heat sink starter 1961, which is schematically shown in FIG. As mentioned above, one of the embodiments of the device 1900 described in Figs. 19-21 is characterized in that the first and second rows of heat sink portions i960 and 1950 can be fixedly attached to each other. The advantage of this characteristic is that the cooling fluid supplied to the second row of heat sink sections 1950 can be brought into direct thermal contact with the first row of heat sink sections I960. 58 This paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the Invention (β) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) and directly cool the first row of heat sink sections I960. A further advantage of this feature is that the cooling fluid can cool the first row of heat sink sections I960, while the first row of heat sinks are connected to the heat source 1940 °. According to this, compared to other configurations, the first row of heat sink sections The 1960 may cool the heat source 1940 more quickly and / or more completely. Fig. 22 is a schematic partial and cross-sectional side view of a device 2200 for heat treating a microelectronic workpiece according to still another embodiment of the present invention. In one feature of this embodiment, the device 2200 may include two heat treatment chambers 2003, as shown in FIG. 22 as the upper chamber 2203a attached to the cover 2230, and the lower chamber 2203a located below the upper chamber 2203a. Department body 2203b. Each of the chamber bodies 2203 may have a base 2210, a lid 2220, and a lid starter 2221 capable of moving the lid 2220 relative to the base 2210. The heat source 1940 may be positioned substantially similar to the foregoing, between the lid 2220 and the base 2210 of each of the chamber bodies 2203. The base 2210 may include a net flow removing channel 2222, a folding surface 2227, and a net flow removing hole 2224 to net the volume in each chamber body 2203 in a manner substantially as described above. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. In a further feature of this embodiment, each chamber body 2203 may include a row of heat sinks 2260, which can be moved relative to the base 2210. According to this, each of the chamber bodies 2203 may include a row of hot groove starters 2261, such as a bellows starter, which can move the row of hot grooves 2260 up and down relative to the base 2210. In a further feature of this embodiment, the heat exhaust tank starter 2261 can be activated by a cooling fluid supplied to the expandable volume 2264 of the heat exhaust tank starter 2261 through the initiator supply channel 2266. In one of the features of this embodiment, the cooling fluid can be advanced from the heat sink starter 2261 to the exit 59. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of the invention) Road (not visible in Figure 22). According to this, the fluid that activates the heat sink starter 2261 can also enter direct thermal contact with the heat sink 2260 to cool the heat sink 2260. The fluid can be a liquid, such as water or a refrigerant. Alternatively, the fluid may be a gas. In a further feature of this embodiment, the base 2210 may include an auxiliary heat sink 2250 constructed integrally with the base 2210. The starter supply aisle 2266 may have a turning path penetrating through the auxiliary heat removal tank 2250 to cool the auxiliary heat removal tank 2250. Alternatively, an individual cooling aisle 'may be provided in the auxiliary heat removal tank 2250 to cool the auxiliary heat removal tank 2250 independently of the heat removal tank 2260. In any embodiment, the device 2200 may include a valve coupled to the starter supply aisle 2266 to independently control the pressure and flow rate of the fluid through the starter supply aisle 2266 to the heat sink starter 2261. . According to this, the fluid flow rate can be increased or decreased to control the cooling rate of the heat removal tank 2260 (or the auxiliary heat removal tank 2250 if necessary), and the fluid pressure can be increased or decreased independently to control the heat removal tank to start. Of the heat sink 2260 and the movement of the heat sink 2260. A feature of the device 2200 described above with reference to FIG. 22 is that the same fluid can be used to start the heat sink starter 2261 and cool the heat sink 2260 (or the auxiliary heat sink 225 as needed). . Compared to other devices that require individual fluid sources for starter operation and cooling of the heat sink, the device 2200 can be simplified. Another advantage is that (as compared to the embodiment of the device 1900 as described in the previous figures 19-21), a fixed entry point (such as the base of the starter 2261) can be used instead of a mobile entry point (such as The entry machine 1957a) of FIG. 20 is used to supply cooling fluid. · An excellent 60 paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) -------- Line. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 A7 B7 V. Description of Invention (M) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The point is, in the narrow volume Here, compared with the first row of heat sinks 2060 (as shown in FIG. 20), the mass of the row of heat sinks 2260 may be larger. According to this, the embodiment of the heat exhaust tank 2260 shown in FIG. 22 can have a more uniform temperature distribution effect than other heat exhaust tanks. Any of the various heat treatment chambers referred to in Figs. 2A-22 described above can be integrated with the wet chemical processing equipment, which is sufficient, and in particular, performs metal electrochemical deposition operations such as copper. One such treatment tool is an LT-210 ™ electroplating unit sold by Semitool Corporation, KalispeU, Montana, USA. Figures 23 and 24 illustrate embodiments of this integration. Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Figure 23 illustrates an embodiment of the system 2300, including a number of processing stations or chambers 2310 (as shown in Figure 23). In one embodiment, the processing stations include one or more wetting / drying station chambers 2310a, and one or more plating stations or chambers 2310b. These plating chambers 2310b may include one or more plating reactors well known to those skilled in the art. References can be made to the following reactors: US Patent 5,985,126 International Application PCT / US99 / 15430 (published as WO 00/03067), International Application PCT / US00 / 10120 (published as WO 00/61498), and International Applications Case PCT / US00 / 10210 (published as WO 00/61837) is hereby incorporated by reference as a whole. In other embodiments, the system 2300 may include other wet chemical processing stations. In addition, the processing stations or application chambers may apply an etchant, a wetting fluid, a drying fluid (such as air) to the workpiece W, and / or by, for example, electroplating, electroless coating, electronic chemical deposition , Physical Vapor Deposition (PVD) and / or Chemical Vapor Deposition (CVD), etc. 61 This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 495885 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs System A7 B7 V. Description of the invention (1) Plating layer or thin layer. The chambers performing these functions are also well known to those skilled in the art. The system 2300 may also include one or more heat treatment chamber bodies 2315 (such as, but not limited to, an annealing chamber body). These heat treatment chamber bodies 2315 may include at least one thermal reactor constructed in accordance with one or more of the previous embodiments to perform an annealing process or additional heat treatment on each workpiece. These workpieces may be transferred between the processing station 2310 and the heat treatment chamber body 2315 by one or more mechanical transfer mechanisms 2320 that are placed to move linearly along the central trajectory 2325. In one feature of this embodiment, the mechanical transfer mechanism 2320 can operate independently to move microelectronic workpieces between each of the processing or application chambers 2310 and the thermal processing chamber 2315. In a further feature of this embodiment, the mechanical transfer mechanism 2320 can transfer one workpiece at a time between the chambers. Alternatively, each mechanical transfer mechanism 2320 may transfer multiple workpieces at a time. In any embodiment, the 'system 2300 can support a plurality of chambers in a single integrated carrier, thereby providing a single enveloping environment, and the chambers and transmission mechanisms are fully operable therein. In one embodiment, a microelectronic workpiece can enter the system 2300 via the input / output area 2312. The transfer mechanism 2320 shifts each workpiece to one of the plating chamber bodies 2310b, in which a blanket coating is applied to the seed layer pre-stored on the workpiece. The transfer mechanism 2320 then moves each workpiece to the wetting / drying station chamber body 2310a, where the workpiece is etched at an oblique angle, cleaned (front and rear), and spin-dried. The workpiece can be held on a single piece, and all processes of the wetting / drying platform chamber body 2310a can be completed at this time. The transmission 62 paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page)

495885 A7 ____B7 ___ 五、發明說明(W ) 機制2320然後將各項工件從該浸濕/乾燥站台室體2310a 移動到熱處理室體2315,以對該毯覆層進行退火。在完成 退火程序後,該傳送機制2320將各項工件移到輸入/輸出 區域2312,在此會將諸工件移出該系統2300。 圖24說明某一具有熱處理站台2435 (位於熱處理部分 2430)的系統2400。在該實施例之一特點中,該熱處理站 台2435處至少某一熱處理器2315是由一專屬機械機制 2440所伺服。該專屬機械機制2440可接受被該機械傳送 機制2320所傳送而來的工件。傳送作業可透過某中介階段 閘門/區域2445而進行。按此,系統2400可潔淨地將系統 2400的熱處理部分2430區隔離該系統其他的部分。或另 者,該熱處理站台2435得經組態設定爲個別模組,而可接 附於既有系統上。 可對前述系統進行各種修改而無虞悖離本發明之基本 教示。本發明雖係按參考如前某一或複數個特定實施例所 詳細描述,然對於熟悉本項技藝之人士而言,應即明瞭確 得對此著手各款變化,而仍不致偏脫於本發明範疇與精神 i.---------丨·裝 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ---訂---------線 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 63 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐)495885 A7 ____B7 ___ V. Description of Invention (W) Mechanism 2320 Then each workpiece is moved from the soaking / drying station chamber body 2310a to the heat treatment chamber body 2315 to anneal the blanket. After the annealing process is completed, the transfer mechanism 2320 moves each workpiece to the input / output area 2312, where the workpieces are removed from the system 2300. Figure 24 illustrates a system 2400 having a heat treatment station 2435 (located in the heat treatment section 2430). In one feature of this embodiment, at least one of the heat processors 2315 at the heat treatment station 2435 is servoed by an exclusive mechanical mechanism 2440. The exclusive mechanical mechanism 2440 can accept workpieces transferred by the mechanical transfer mechanism 2320. Transfers can be made through an intermediary gate / zone 2445. According to this, the system 2400 can cleanly isolate the heat treatment portion 2430 of the system 2400 from the rest of the system. Alternatively, the heat treatment station 2435 can be configured as an individual module and can be attached to an existing system. Various modifications can be made to the foregoing system without departing from the basic teachings of the present invention. Although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to one or more specific embodiments as described above, for those familiar with the art, it should be clear that various changes can be made to it without deviating from this. The scope and spirit of the invention i .--------- 丨 · install (please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) --- order --------- Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Printed by Employee Consumer Cooperatives 63 This paper is sized for China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm)

Claims (1)

495885 A8 _______ D8 六、申請專利範圍 1·-種用於熱處理微電子工件之裝置,包括: 一可置放以接合並支撐該微電子工件的工件支架;以 及 一熱源,其具有固體接合表面,並經置放以接合於該 微電子工件之一表面,而該熱源可進一步包括一直接附接 及/或整合於該熱源的熱產生器,該熱源與該工件支架中至 少一者’係可相對另者而移動於該微電子工件接觸該熱源 接合表面之第一位置,與該微電子工件隔置於該接合表面 之第二位置間,該熱源係經尺寸調制,而當該微電子工件 接合於該熱源時,以足夠熱處理該微電子工件之既選材質 的速率,將熱傳送給該微電子工件。 2·如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,進一步包括: 一框架: 一第一組件,固定於該框架並相對於該框架而將該熱 源支撐在某固定位置; 一第一排熱槽,係由該第一組件所支撐,並可相對於 該第一組件,而移動於該第一排熱槽按空間與該熱源相互 間隔之第一位置,和該第一排熱槽接合於該熱源之第二位 置間; 一第一啓動器,耦接於低部組件與該第一排熱槽之間 ,以相對於該低部組件來移動該第一排熱槽; 一第二組件,固定於該框架並支撐一室蓋,該室蓋係 可相對於該第二組件,而移動於該機蓋按空間與該第一組 件相互間隔之第一位置,和該機蓋接合於該第一組件之第 1 —.---------— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂· -丨線丨 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A8 g D8 六、申請專利範圍 二位置間,而當機蓋位在第二位置時’該機蓋與該第一組 件可定義出圍繞在該微電子工件而爲至少部分地包封的室 體, 一第二啓動器,耦接於該室蓋與該第二組件之間’以 移動該機蓋於第一和第二位置間;以及 一第二排熱槽,相對於該第一組件而固定,係經耦接 至冷卻流體供應處,而當該第一排熱槽位於其第二位置時 ,該第二排熱槽係接合於該第一排熱槽熱源。 3. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,其中該工件支 架係經尺寸調制以支撐僅單一個微電子工件,並且熱源係 經組態設計以於給定的處理循環過程中接觸到不超過一個 以上的微電子工件。 4. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,其中該熱源包 括一可耦接到真空源的滇空孔洞,並且當該微電子工件接 合於該工件支架時係面朝該微電子工件,以汲引該微電子 工件朝向該熱源。 5. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,進一步包括一 淨除流體通道,具有可耦接至淨除流體源的注入口和鄰近 於該工件支架的排出口,該淨除流體通道經置放以當該工 件支架支撐該微電子工件時,可將該淨除流體從淨除流體 源導引流至鄰近於該微電子工件的區域。 6·如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,其中該熱源包 括一電阻式加熱器。 7·如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,進一步包括一 2 本紙 1ft尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) ' (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·裝 訂“ -線. 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印剔衣 495885 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 排熱槽,其耦接於一啓動器,並相對該熱源,移動於該排 熱槽接合到該熱源之第一位置與該排熱槽卸離於該熱源之 第二位置間,該啓動器係可耦接至加壓冷卻流體源以移動 該啓動器,該啓動器具有按流體傳通於該排熱槽的流體體 積,藉以冷卻該排熱槽。 8.如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,進一步包括第 一與第二排熱槽,該第二排熱槽係空間間隔於該熱源,並 耦接至一冷卻流體供應處,而該第一排熱槽置放於該第二 排熱槽與該熱源之間,該第一排熱槽可相對該第二排熱槽 ,移動於該第一排熱槽接合於該第二排熱槽以冷卻該第一 排熱槽之第一位置,與該第一排熱槽接合於該熱源以冷卻 該熱源與該微電子工件之第二位置間,如當該微電子工件 確係接合於該熱源時。V. 9·如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,進一步包括第 一與第二排熱槽,而一啓動器係耦接於該第一與第二排熱 槽之間,該啓動器可耦接到一冷卻流體供應處,以將該啓 動器自該第一排熱槽接合於該熱源之第一組態,改變爲該 第一排熱槽間隔於該熱源之第二組態。 10·如申請專利範圍第9項所述之裝置,其中該啓動器 包括一經組態設定以將冷卻流體遞送進入該啓動器內的風 箱,俾直接接觸於該第一排熱槽。 11·如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,進一步包括一 排熱槽,可相對該熱源而移動於該排熱槽接合於該熱源之 第一位置,與該排熱槽卸離於該熱源之第二位置間,該熱 3 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 訂 -線· 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 源具有可耦接至冷卻流體來源之流體通道的第一部份,該 排熱槽具有一鄰近於該流體通道的第二部分,而當該流體 通道流經該流體通道時,可冷卻該第二部分。 12. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,進一步包括第 一與第二排熱槽,而該第二排熱槽係空間間隔於該熱源, 並耦接至一冷卻流體供應處,而該第二排熱槽可進一步具 有一接合於耦接至真空源之真空孔洞的接合表面,且該第 一排熱槽置放於該第二排熱槽與該熱源之間,該第一排熱 槽可相對該第二排熱槽,移動於第一位置與第二位置之間 ,當該第一排熱槽位於第一位置時,該第一排熱槽可接合 於該第二排熱槽的接合表面,以覆蓋該真空孔洞並冷卻該 第一排熱槽,而當該微電子工件確係接合於該熱源且該第 一排熱槽位於第二位置時,該第一排熱槽可接合於該熱源 ,以冷卻該熱源與該微電子工件。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 13. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,其中該熱源具 有一接觸部分之電阻元件,並且其中該裝置可進一步包含 一電性與熱傳導連接器,具有第一端點與反置於該第一端 點的第二端點,該連接器係接合於朝向該連接器第一端點 的電阻元件接觸部分,該連接器可耦接於朝向該連接器第 二端點的電流源,而在該第一端點和該第二端點間之連接 器剖示區域的分配方式,以及電流行經該連接器的旅流過 程,係經尺寸調制俾產生至少等於通過該連接器因熱傳導 而致之熱損失的電阻加熱效果。 14. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,其中該熱源具 4 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公髮) 495885 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 有一既經組態設定,可按該微電子工件某單位面積之第一 速率,來傳送熱給該微電子工件的第一區域,而該熱源可 進一步含有一既經組態設定,可按該微電子工件某單位面 積之第二速率,來傳送熱給該微電子工件的第二區域,在 此該單位面積之第二速率係高於該單位面積之第一速率。 15. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,其中更包括微 電子工件。 16. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,其中該熱源係 經尺寸調制,以足夠對該微電子工件選定材質進行退火作 業的速率,來傳送熱給該微電子工件。 17. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,其中該選定材 質包括焊劑,並且其中該熱源係經尺寸調制,以足夠對該 焊劑進行重導的速率,來傳送熱給該微電子工件。 18. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之裝置,其中該選定材 質包括光阻層,並且其中該熱源係經尺寸調制,以按足夠 對該光阻層進行修癒及/或烘烤的速率,來傳送熱給該微電 子工件。 19_ 一種用於熱處理至少第一與第二微電子工件之裝置 ,包括: 一第一熱處理室體,其具有一經置放以接合並支撐該 第一微電子工件的第一工件支架,該第一室體可進一步含 有一第一熱源,經尺寸調制以當該第一微電子工件係最鄰 近於該第一熱源時,以足夠低溫程序來進行熱處理該第一 微電子工件的速率,而傳送熱給該第一微電子工件;以及 5 ^張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ~ (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·裝 訂· 線- 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印制衣 495885 A8 g D8 六、申請專利範圍 一第二熱處理室體,鄰近於該第一室體並具有經置放 以接合並支撐該第二微電子工件的第二工件支架,該第二 室體可進一步含有一第二熱源,其係經尺寸調制,以當該 第二微電子工件係最鄰近於該第二熱源時,以足夠以低溫 程序來進行熱處理該第二微電子工件的速率,而傳送熱給 該第二微電子工件,並且該第一室體係相對於該第二室體 而置放,使得位於該第一與第二室體之間的第一室體之一 部分會於該第二室體共用。 20. 如申請專利範圍第19項所述之裝置’其中該第一 室體係置放在該第二室體之上,並且其中該第一與第二室 體間所共用的部分可定義該第一室體的低部表面和該第二 室體的上部表面。 21. 如申請專利範圍第19項所述之裝置’其中該第一 工件支架係可相對該第一熱源而移動於第一位置與第二位 置之間,而進一步其中該第一熱源可包括一固體接合表面 ,當該工件支架係處於第一位置時,其會接合於該第一微 電子工件,而當該工件支架係處於第二位置時,其則會離 開該第一微電子工件,且其中該裝置可進一步在該熱源下 方含有一排熱槽。 22. 如申請專利範圍第19項所述之裝置,其中該第一 室體包括一置放以供應淨除氣體給該第二室體的淨除氣體 通道。 23. 如申請專利範圍第19項所述之裝置,其中該第一 室體與該第二室體係屬模組化並可交換應用。 6 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·裝 495885 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 24·如申請專利範圍第19項所述之裝置,其中該第一 室體包括一第一室蓋,可移動於接收該第一微電子工件的 開啓位置,與至少部分地包封該第一微電子工件的關閉位 置之間,並進一步其中該第二室體包括一第二室蓋,可移 動於接收該第二微電子工件的開啓位置,與至少部分地包 封該第二微電子工件的關閉位置之間,其中該裝置可進一 步包含一支撐該第一熱源的基座組件,而與其第二室蓋互 爲接合且倚靠於該基座組件。 2 5 ·如申g靑專利範圍第19項所述之裝置’其中該第一 工件支架係經尺寸調制,以一次不會支撐超過一個以上的 微電子工件,而該第一熱源係經尺寸調制,以一次不會接 觸超過一個以上的微電子工件。 26. 如申請專利範圍第19項所述之裝置,其中更包括 第一與第二排熱槽,而該第二排熱槽係間隔置於該第一排 熱槽’並耦接於冷卻流體供應處,而該第一排熱槽置放於 該第二排熱槽與該熱源之間,該第一排熱槽可相對該第二 排熱槽’移動於該第一排熱槽接合於該第二排熱槽以冷卻 該第一排熱槽之第一位置,當該微電子工件確係接合於該 熱源時’該第一排熱槽係接合於該熱源以冷卻該熱源與該 微電子工件之第二位置間。 27. —種用於熱處理某微電子工件之裝置,包括·· 一裝置支架; 一熱源,由該裝置支架所支撐,並經組態設定以於低 溫程序內交遞熱給該微電子工件; 7 :尺度適用f國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 酶 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·裝 訂· 線_ 495885 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 一工件支架,置放鄰近於該熱源’俾相對於該熱源而 接合和支撐該微電子工件;以及 一排熱槽,鄰近於該熱源並經放置以選擇性地自該熱 源傳送熱,俾冷卻該熱源與該微電子工件。 28. 如申請專利範圍第27項所述之裝置’其中該裝置 支架係可相對該熱源而移動於該微電子工件接觸到該熱源 之第一位置,且該微電子工件隔離於該熱源之第二位置間 〇 29. 如申請專利範圍第27項所述之裝置,其中該排熱 槽包括一不會將冷卻流體耦接至此的被動性傳導排熱槽。 30. 如申請專利範圍第27項所述之裝置,其中該排熱 '槽與該熱源中至少一者可相對另者而移動於該排熱槽接合 到該熱源之接合位置,和該排熱槽隔離於該熱源之卸離位 置間。 31. 如申請專利範圍第27項所述之裝置,其中該排熱 槽爲第一排熱槽,而接合位置爲第一接合位置,而其中該 裝置可進一步包括一隔離於該第一排熱槽並耦接於冷卻流 體供應處的第二排熱槽,而其中該第一排熱槽係置放於該 第二排熱槽和該熱源之間,該第一排熱槽可相對該第二排 熱槽,而移動於該第一排熱槽接合到該熱源之第一接合位 置,和該第一排熱槽接合於該第二排熱槽以冷卻該第一排 熱槽之第二接合位置間。 32. 如申請專利範圍第27項所述之裝置,其中該排熱 槽的熱質量會高過熱源的熱質量。 8 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ··!裝 訂· 線- 495885 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 33.如申請專利範圍第27項所述之裝置,其中該排熱 槽的熱容量會高過熱源的熱容量。 3(如申請專利範圍第27項所述之裝置,其中該工件 支架係經尺寸調制,以一次不會支撐超過一個以上的微電 子工件,而該熱源係經尺寸調制,以一次不會接觸超過一 個以上的微電子工件。 35·如申請專利範圍第27項所述之裝置,其中該熱源 包括一可耦接於某真空源,並當微電子工件係接合於該工 件支架時,係面朝該微電子工件的真空孔洞,藉以汲引該 微電子工件朝向該熱源。 36·如申請專利範圍第27項所述之裝置,其中該排熱 槽具有一接合表面,可壓縮於當排熱槽卸離於該熱源時的 未壓組態,與當該排熱槽接合於該熱源的壓縮組態兩者之 37. —種用於熱處理一微電子工件之裝置.,包括: 一可置放以接合並支撐該微電子工件的工件支架; 一具有電阻元件和電子接觸部分的熱源,該熱源係經 組態設定而以當該微電子工件係最鄰近於該熱源時,可以 足夠以低溫程序來進行熱處理該微電子工件的速率,而傳 送熱給該微電子工件;以及 一電性與熱傳導連接器,具有第一端點與反置於該第 一端點的第二端點,該連接器接合於朝向該連接器第一端 點的電阻元件接觸部分,該連接器可耦接於朝向該連接器 第二端點的電流源,而在該第一端點和該第二端點間之連 9 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 言 -矣·495885 A8 _______ D8 VI. Application scope 1 · A device for heat treatment of microelectronic workpieces, including: a workpiece holder that can be placed to engage and support the microelectronic workpiece; and a heat source with a solid bonding surface, And placed to be bonded to a surface of the microelectronic workpiece, and the heat source may further include a heat generator directly attached and / or integrated with the heat source, the heat source and at least one of the workpiece holders may be It is moved relative to the first position where the microelectronic workpiece contacts the heat source joint surface, and is separated from the microelectronic workpiece between the second position of the joint surface. The heat source is dimensionally adjusted, and when the microelectronic workpiece is When engaged with the heat source, heat is transferred to the microelectronic workpiece at a rate sufficient to heat treat the selected material of the microelectronic workpiece. 2. The device according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, further comprising: a frame: a first component fixed to the frame and supporting the heat source at a fixed position relative to the frame; a first row of heat sinks Is supported by the first component and can be moved relative to the first component to a first position where the first row of heat sinks are spaced apart from the heat source in space, and the first row of heat sinks are joined to the Between the second position of the heat source; a first starter, coupled between the lower component and the first row of heat sinks, to move the first row of heat sinks relative to the lower element; a second assembly, Fixed to the frame and supporting a chamber cover, which is movable relative to the second component in a first position where the cover is spaced from the first component in space and the cover is connected to the first component The first of a component —.---------— (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Order ·-丨 Line 丨 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives This paper is applicable to this paper China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A8 g D8 6. The scope of the patent application is between two positions, and when the cover is in the second position, the cover and the first component can define a chamber body that is at least partially enclosed around the microelectronic workpiece. A second starter coupled between the cover and the second component to move the cover between the first and second positions; and a second row of heat sinks relative to the first component Fixed, is coupled to the cooling fluid supply, and when the first row of heat sinks is in its second position, the second row of heat sinks is coupled to the first row of heat sinks heat sources. 3. The device according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the workpiece support is sized to support only a single microelectronic workpiece, and the heat source is configured to contact the non-contact during a given processing cycle. More than one microelectronic workpiece. 4. The device according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the heat source includes a Diankong hole which can be coupled to a vacuum source, and the microelectronic workpiece faces the microelectronic workpiece when the microelectronic workpiece is engaged with the workpiece holder, To draw the microelectronic workpiece toward the heat source. 5. The device according to item 1 of the scope of the patent application, further comprising a net fluid removal channel having an injection port which can be coupled to a net fluid removal source and a discharge port adjacent to the workpiece holder. Placed so that when the workpiece holder supports the microelectronic workpiece, the net fluid can be directed from the net fluid removal source to an area adjacent to the microelectronic workpiece. 6. The device according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the heat source includes a resistance heater. 7 · The device described in item 1 of the scope of patent application, further including a 2 paper 1ft standard applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 public love) '(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page ) · Binding "-line. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed 495885. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, printed A8 B8 C8 D8. 6. The patent application scope heat sink is coupled to a starter. And relative to the heat source, moved between a first position where the heat exhaust groove is joined to the heat source and a second position where the heat exhaust groove is detached from the heat source, the starter can be coupled to a source of pressurized cooling fluid for movement The starter, which has a volume of fluid that passes through the heat sink according to the fluid, thereby cooling the heat sink. 8. The device according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, further comprising first and second rows The heat sink, the second row of heat sinks is spaced apart from the heat source and is coupled to a cooling fluid supply, and the first row of heat sinks is placed between the second row of heat sinks and the heat source. A row of heat sinks can be opposite to the first The heat exhaust groove is moved at a first position where the first heat exhaust groove is joined to the second heat exhaust groove to cool the first heat exhaust groove, and the first heat exhaust groove is joined to the heat source to cool the heat source and the heat sink. Between the second position of the microelectronic workpiece, such as when the microelectronic workpiece is indeed connected to the heat source. V. 9 · The device described in the first item of the patent application scope further includes a first and a second row of heat sinks, An initiator is coupled between the first and second heat sinks, and the initiator can be coupled to a cooling fluid supply to connect the starter from the first heat sink to the heat source. The first configuration is changed to a second configuration in which the first row of heat sinks is spaced from the heat source. 10. The device as described in item 9 of the scope of patent application, wherein the starter includes a configuration configured to transfer cooling fluid The bellows delivered into the starter directly contacts the first row of heat sinks. 11. The device described in item 1 of the patent application scope further includes a row of heat sinks that can be moved relative to the heat source. The heat exhaust groove is connected to the first position of the heat source, and the heat exhaust groove is detached from the heat source. Between the second position of the source, the heat 3 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) Binding-thread · This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 6. The scope of the patent application source has a first portion of a fluid channel that can be coupled to a cooling fluid source, the heat sink has a second portion adjacent to the fluid channel, and when the fluid channel flows through the fluid channel The second part can be cooled at the time. 12. The device according to item 1 of the patent application scope further includes a first and a second row of heat sinks, and the second row of heat sinks are spaced apart from the heat source and are coupled Is connected to a cooling fluid supply, and the second row of heat sinks may further have a joint surface that is coupled to a vacuum hole coupled to a vacuum source, and the first row of heat sinks is disposed between the second row of heat sinks and Between the heat sources, the first row of heat sinks can be moved between the first and second positions relative to the second row of heat sinks. When the first row of heat sinks is in the first position, the first row of heat sinks The groove is engageable with the engagement of the second row of heat sinks Surface to cover the vacuum hole and cool the first row of heat sinks, and when the microelectronic workpiece is indeed connected to the heat source and the first row of heat sinks is in a second position, the first row of heat sinks can be joined to The heat source is used to cool the heat source and the microelectronic workpiece. Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 13. The device described in item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the heat source has a resistive element of a contact portion, and wherein the device may further include an electrical and thermally conductive connector, The connector has a first end point and a second end point opposite to the first end point. The connector is connected to a resistive element contact portion facing the first end point of the connector, and the connector can be coupled to the connection. The current source at the second end of the connector, and the distribution method of the cross-sectional area of the connector between the first end and the second end, and the travel process of the current passing through the connector, are generated by size modulation. Resistive heating effect at least equal to the heat loss due to thermal conduction through the connector. 14. The device described in item 1 of the scope of patent application, in which the heat source has 4 paper sizes, which are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297). 495885 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A8 B8 C8 D8 6. The scope of the patent application has been configured and configured to transmit heat to the first area of the microelectronic workpiece at the first rate of a certain unit area of the microelectronic workpiece, and the heat source may further contain an existing It can be configured to transfer heat to the second area of the microelectronic workpiece at the second rate of the unit area of the microelectronic workpiece, where the second rate of the unit area is higher than the first rate of the unit area rate. 15. The device described in item 1 of the scope of patent application, which further includes a microelectronic workpiece. 16. The device according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the heat source is sized to transfer heat to the microelectronic workpiece at a rate sufficient to anneal the selected material of the microelectronic workpiece. 17. The device according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the selected material comprises a flux, and wherein the heat source is sized to transfer heat to the microelectronic workpiece at a rate sufficient to re-direct the flux. 18. The device according to item 1 of the scope of patent application, wherein the selected material includes a photoresist layer, and wherein the heat source is sized to adjust the photoresist layer at a rate sufficient to heal and / or bake. To transfer heat to the microelectronic workpiece. 19_ A device for heat treatment of at least a first and a second microelectronic workpiece, comprising: a first heat treatment chamber body having a first workpiece holder placed to engage and support the first microelectronic workpiece, the first The chamber body may further include a first heat source that is sized to transmit heat when the first microelectronic workpiece is closest to the first heat source at a rate sufficient to perform heat treatment on the first microelectronic workpiece. For this first microelectronic workpiece; and 5 ^ sheets of scale applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) ~ (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) · Binding · Line-Ministry of Economic Affairs Intellectual Property Bureau employee consumer cooperative printed clothing 495885 A8 g D8 Sixth, the scope of patent application-a second heat treatment chamber body, which is adjacent to the first chamber body and has a second placed to join and support the second microelectronic workpiece The workpiece holder, the second chamber body may further contain a second heat source, which is adjusted in size so that when the second microelectronic workpiece is closest to the second heat source, the temperature is sufficiently low. A program to heat treat the second microelectronic workpiece at a rate that transmits heat to the second microelectronic workpiece, and the first chamber system is positioned relative to the second chamber body so that it is located in the first and second chambers A portion of the first chamber body between the bodies is shared by the second chamber body. 20. The device according to item 19 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first chamber system is placed on the second chamber body, and a portion shared between the first and second chamber bodies may define the first chamber system. The lower surface of one chamber body and the upper surface of the second chamber body. 21. The device according to item 19 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first workpiece support is movable between a first position and a second position relative to the first heat source, and further wherein the first heat source may include a A solid joint surface, when the workpiece holder is in the first position, it will engage with the first microelectronic workpiece, and when the workpiece holder is in the second position, it will leave the first microelectronic workpiece, and The device may further include a row of heat sinks under the heat source. 22. The device according to item 19 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first chamber body includes a degassing channel disposed to supply net degassing to the second chamber body. 23. The device according to item 19 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first chamber body and the second chamber system are modular and can be used interchangeably. 6 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) · Installed 495885 Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Consumer Cooperatives A8 B8 C8 D8 6. The scope of patent application 24. The device according to item 19 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first chamber body includes a first chamber cover that is movable in an open position for receiving the first microelectronic workpiece, and at least partially Encapsulating between the closed position of the first microelectronic workpiece, and further wherein the second chamber body includes a second chamber cover that is movable to an open position receiving the second microelectronic workpiece, and at least partially encapsulates the Between the closed positions of the second microelectronic workpiece, the device may further include a base assembly supporting the first heat source, and its second chamber cover is engaged with each other and leans against the base assembly. 2 5 · The device described in item 19 of the patent scope of claim 'wherein the first workpiece holder is dimensionally adjusted so as not to support more than one microelectronic workpiece at a time, and the first heat source is dimensionally modulated In order not to touch more than one microelectronic workpiece at a time. 26. The device according to item 19 of the patent application scope, further comprising a first and a second row of heat sinks, and the second row of heat sinks are spaced apart from the first row of heat sinks and coupled to the cooling fluid. Supply, and the first row of heat sinks is placed between the second row of heat sinks and the heat source, and the first row of heat sinks can be moved relative to the second row of heat sinks to the first row of heat sinks and joined to The second row of heat sinks is used to cool the first position of the first row of heat sinks. When the microelectronic workpiece is indeed joined to the heat source, the 'first row of heat sinks is joined to the heat source to cool the heat source and the micro Between the second position of the electronic workpiece. 27. A device for heat-treating a microelectronic workpiece, including a device holder; a heat source supported by the device holder and configured to deliver heat to the microelectronic workpiece in a low temperature program; 7: The standard applies to the national standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) of enzyme (please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) · Binding · Thread 495885 Printed by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Patent application scope A workpiece holder is placed adjacent to the heat source, and the microelectronic workpiece is joined and supported relative to the heat source; and a row of heat sinks is adjacent to the heat source and placed to be selective Ground heat is transferred from the heat source, and the heat source and the microelectronic workpiece are cooled. 28. The device according to item 27 of the scope of patent application, wherein the device holder is movable relative to the heat source at a first position where the microelectronic workpiece contacts the heat source, and the microelectronic workpiece is isolated from the heat source. Between two positions 029. The device according to item 27 of the patent application scope, wherein the heat removal tank includes a passive conductive heat removal tank that does not couple the cooling fluid thereto. 30. The device according to item 27 of the scope of patent application, wherein at least one of the heat removal tank and the heat source can be moved relative to the other at the joining position where the heat removal tank is joined to the heat source, and the heat removal The slot is isolated between the evacuation position of the heat source. 31. The device as described in claim 27, wherein the heat sink is a first row of heat sinks, and the joint position is a first joint position, and wherein the apparatus may further include an isolation from the first row of heat The tank is coupled to a second heat sink at the cooling fluid supply, and the first heat sink is placed between the second heat sink and the heat source. The first heat sink can be opposite to the first heat sink. Two rows of heat sinks moved to a first joining position where the first row of heat sinks is joined to the heat source, and the first row of heat sinks is joined to the second row of heat sinks to cool the second row of the first row of heat sinks Between joint positions. 32. The device according to item 27 of the scope of patent application, wherein the heat mass of the heat removal tank is higher than that of the heat source. 8 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ··! Binding · Thread-495885 Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs System A8 B8 C8 D8 6. Application scope of patent 33. The device described in item 27 of the scope of patent application, wherein the heat capacity of the heat exhaust tank will be higher than that of the superheat source. 3 (The device according to item 27 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the workpiece holder is dimensionally adjusted so that it does not support more than one microelectronic workpiece at a time, and the heat source is dimensioned so that it does not touch more than one time. More than one microelectronic workpiece. 35. The device according to item 27 of the patent application scope, wherein the heat source includes a vacuum source that can be coupled to the microelectronic workpiece when the microelectronic workpiece is attached to the workpiece holder, and the system faces The vacuum hole of the microelectronic workpiece draws the microelectronic workpiece toward the heat source. 36. The device according to item 27 of the patent application scope, wherein the heat sink has a joint surface and can be compressed when the heat sink is discharged. 37. The uncompressed configuration when separated from the heat source, and the compressed configuration when the heat sink is connected to the heat source. 37. A device for heat treatment of a microelectronic workpiece, including: A workpiece holder for engaging and supporting the microelectronic workpiece; a heat source having a resistance element and an electronic contact portion, the heat source being configured to be set so that when the microelectronic workpiece is closest to the heat source, Heat is transferred to the microelectronic workpiece at a rate sufficient to perform thermal processing of the microelectronic workpiece at a low temperature procedure; and an electrical and thermally conductive connector having a first end point and a second end opposite the first end point. Terminal, the connector is engaged with a resistive element contact portion facing the first terminal of the connector, the connector may be coupled to a current source toward the second terminal of the connector, and at the first terminal and the Connection between the second endpoint 9 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 接器剖示區域的分配方式,以及電流行經該連接器的移動 過程’係經尺寸調制,俾產生至少等於通過該連接器因熱 傳導而致之熱損失的電阻加熱效果。 38·如申請專利範圍第37項所述之裝置,其中該連接 器具有至少部分之圓錐狀外型,而朝向第一端點處會比起 朝向第二端點具有較大的直徑,更進一步其中該連接器外 部邊緣係某平面上的曲線,而該平面會與延伸於第一端點 與第二端點之間的直軸相互平行。 39·如申請專利範圍第37項所述之裝置,其中當微電 子工件被放在工件支架上時,該電子終端部分係置放鄰近 於該微電子工件的外部邊緣。 40. 如申請專利範圍第37項所述之裝置,其中該熱源 與該工件支架至少其中一者可相對另者,而移動於該微電 子工件接觸到該熱源接合表面的第一位置,與該微電子工 件隔離於該接合表面的第二位置之間。 41. 如申請專利範圍第37項所述之裝置,其中更包括 一支撐該熱源的基座組件;以及 一室蓋,可相對該基座組件,可移動於開啓位置與關 閉位置之間,而置放該室蓋與該基座組件,以當該室蓋位 在開啓位置時可於其間接收該微電子工件,並當該室蓋位 在關閉位置時,該室蓋與該基座組件可至少部分包封該微 電子工件。 42. 如申請專利範圍第37項所述之裝置,其中該熱源 10 --------------- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·- --線_ 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 係經尺寸調制,以當該微電子工件最鄰近該熱源時,可按 足夠對該微電子工件選定材質進行退火作業的速率,來傳 送熱給該微電子工件。 43.如申請專利範圍第37項所述之裝置,更包括微電 子工件。 44_一種用於熱處理一微電子工件之裝置,包括: 一經組態設定以支撐該微電子工件的工件支架;以及 一熱源,置放鄰近於該工件支架,並具有一既經組態 設定,可在一低溫製程中,按該微電子工件某單位面積之 第一速率,來傳送熱給該微電子工件的第一區域,該熱源 可進一步包含一既經組態設定,可在低溫製程中按該微電 子工件之一單位面積之第二速率,來傳送熱給該微電子工 件的第二區域,而該每單位面積之第二速率係高於該單位 面積之第一速率。 45. 如申請專利範圍第44項所述之裝置.,其中該工件 支架與該熱源至少一者係相對另者,而移動於該熱源接合 到該微電子工件,俾往返於該微電子工件來傳送熱之第一 位置,和該熱源隔離於該微電子工件之第二位置間。 經濟部智慧財產局員Η消費合作社印製 46. 如申請專利範圍第44項所述之裝置,其中該微電 子工件包括一外部區域與一置放於自該外部區域而朝內的 內部區域,且進一步其中當該微電子工件由工件支架所支 撐時,該熱源第一區域係對齊於該微電子工件的內部區域 ,該熱源第二區域則是對齊於該微電子工件的外部區域。 47·如申請專利範圍第44項所述之裝置,其中更包括 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐〉 495885 A8 B8 C8 —~~ ---[一- 六、申請專利範圍 第〜與第二電阻式加熱器,其設置成供應熱給該第一 區域;以及 第二與第四電阻式加熱器,其設置成供應熱給該桌一 區域。 V: 48·如申請專利範圍雀44項所述之裝置,其中該熱源 槪爲圓型,並具有一圓心和半徑,更進一步其_中該第一區 域係按放射狀而由該第二區域朝內置放,並且其中該單位 面積第二速率係約7.5%之分數高於該單位面積第一速率, 該分數値係對應於第二區域到熱源圓心的距離除以該熱源 半徑之除數。 49·如申請專利範圍第44項所述之裝置,其中該熱源 槪爲圓型,並具有一半徑和圓心,更進一步其中該熱源所 產生之微電子基板每卓租面積的電力,會按放射方向自圓 心處朝外,至少橫越於会熱源之一部分而逐漸增加。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 50. 如申請專利範圍第44項所述之裝置,其中該熱源 具有一外部邊源和自該外部邊源而朝內的內部邊緣’且進 一步其中該熱源所產生之微電子基板每單位面積的電力’ 會按放射方向從該外部邊源而朝內,至少橫越於該熱源某 部分而逐漸增加。 51. 如申請專利範圍第44項所述之裝置,其中該熱源 包括至少一個具有接觸區域以耦接至電力來源的電阻元件 ,更進一步其中,相較於該第一區域,該第二區域係經置 放可更貼近於該接觸區域。 12 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 52.如申請專利範圍第44項所述之裝置,其中該熱源 槪爲圓型,並包括一延展之電阻加熱器,具有槪爲固定之 剖面面積,並且其中該加熱器至少一部份爲雙疊以自倚靠 ,而沿著第一區域和第二區域內兩者內複數個分隔之圓環 線路所延伸,在第一區域內的圓環線路彼此係按第一距離 而空間相隔,在第二區域內的圓環線路彼此則係按小於該 第一距離之第二距離而空間相隔。 i 53.如申請專利範圍第44項所述之裝置,其中該熱源 包括一具有基板表面面積的基板,以及鄰近於該基板並具 有加熱器阻抗表面面積的電阻加熱器,該加熱器阻抗表面 面積約爲67%的基板表面面積。 54. 如申請專利範圍第44項所述之裝置,其中該熱源 包括一位在第一區域裡而耦接某第一控制器的第一電阻加 熱器,以及一位在第二區域裡而耦接某第二控制器的第二 電阻加熱器,可獨立地控制該些第一和第二控制器,以與 提供電力給第二區域相互獨立的方式,來提供電力給該第 —區域。 55. —種用於熱處理一微電子工件之裝置,包括: 一經組態設定以支撐該微電子工件的工件支架;以及 一熱源,置放鄰近於該工件支架,以於某低溫製程中 ,傳送熱給該微電子基板; 一第一排熱槽,經置放以最鄰近於該熱源俾冷卻該熱 源;以及。 一第二排熱槽,經置放以最鄰近於該第一排熱槽俾冷 13 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·裝 -線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A8 B8 C8 ___ D8 六、申請專利範圍 卻該第一排熱槽。 56·如申請專利範圍第55項所述之裝置,其中該第一 排熱槽可相對該熱源與該第二排熱槽,而移動於該第一排 熱槽接合到該熱源俾冷卻該熱源之第一位置’和該第一排 熱槽接合於該第二排熱槽以冷卻該第一排熱槽之第二位置 間。 57·如申請專利範圍第55項所述之裝置,其中該熱源 係置放於該第一排熱槽之上。 58. 如申請專利範圍第55項所述之裝置,其中該工件 支架可移動於該微電子工件接合到該熱源之接合位置’且 一具有該微電子工件之卸離位置係卸離於該熱源。 59. 如申請專利範圍第55項所述之裝置,其中更包括 一微電子工件。 60·—種用於退火處理一微電子工件之裝置’包括: 一裝置支架; 一相對固定於該裝置支架的基座; 一室蓋,經置放鄰近於該基座,並可相對該基座而移 動於接收該微電子工件的開啓位置與關閉位置之間,而當 該室蓋位於該關閉位置時,該室蓋與該基座可定義出一退 火室體; 一工件支架,置放於該室蓋與該基座間,以接合並支 撐該微電子工件; 一熱源,相對固定於該基座,並放置以於低溫程序內 傳送熱給該微電子工件; 14 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) —----------hi 裝— (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 訂· 丨線- 495885 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 儲 C8 _____ D8 六、申請專利範圍 一第一排熱槽,可相對該熱源,移動於該第一排熱槽 接合到該熱源的第一位置,與該第一排熱槽隔離於該熱源 的第二位置之間;以及 一第二排熱槽,可相對該基座而固定,並具有一接合 表面’置放以接合該第一排熱槽,而當該第一排熱槽位在 第二位置時,可傳送從該第一排熱槽而來的熱。 61·如申請專利範圍第60項所述之裝置,其中更包括 一第一風箱啓動器,連接至該室蓋並耦接到加壓流體 來源’以移動該室蓋於開啓位置與關閉位置之間;以及 一第二風箱啓動器,連接至該第一排熱槽,並耦接到 加壓流體來源,以移動該第一排熱槽於接合位置與卸離位 置之間。 62·一種用於熱處理一微電子工件之裝置,包括: 至少一第一處理室體,而當對微電子工件執行一第一 製程時’具有一經組態設定以支撐該微電子工件的第一工 件支架; 該第二處理室體可具有一經置放以接合並支撐該微電 子工件的第二工件支架,該第二處理室體可進—步具有一 熱源’而固體接合表面經置放以接合於該微電子工件的某 表面,而該熱源和該第二工件支架至少其一可相對於另者 ,而移動於該微電子工件接觸到該熱源接合表面的第一位 置’與該微電子工件隔離於該熱源接合表面的第二位置之 間’該熱源係經尺寸調制而當該第一微電子工件接合於該 15 本紙張尺度適用中國國^票準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) ' (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·裝 οά. -I線· 495885 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 熱源時’以於低溫製程程序中,按足得熱處理該微電子工 .件既選材質的速率,將熱傳送給該微電子工件;以及 一工件傳送單元,可置放鄰近於該第一與第二處理室 體至少其中一者,該工件傳送單元可相對該第一與第二處 理室體而移動,該工件傳送單元可進一步包括一經組態設 定’以當該工件傳送單元相對於該第一與第二處理室體而 移動時,可接合到至少某一微電子工件的工件接合部分。 63·如申請專利範圍第62項所述之裝置,其中該第一 處理室體係至少兩個第一處理室體之其中一者,而進一步 其中該工件傳送單元爲至少兩個工件傳送單元之其中一者 ,而其一工件傳送單元可爲置放以移動第一微電子工件於 某第一處理室體與該第二處理室體之間,並且另一工件傳 送單元可爲置放以獨立地移動第二微電子工件於另一第一 處理室體與該第二處理室體之間。 64·如申請專利範圍第62項所述之裝置,其中該工件 傳送單元爲兩個工件傳送單元其中一者,每一個係經組態 設計以支撐一單一微電子工件。 65·如申請專利範圍第62項所述之裝置,其中更包括 一裝置支架,可支撐該第一處理室體、該第二處理室體和 工件傳送單元,並且進一步其中該第二處理室體係可相對 該裝置支架和該工件傳送單元而移動,以令當該工件傳送 單元支撐該微電子工件時,該第二處理室體可齊準於該微 電子工件。 66.如申請專利範圍第62項所述之裝置’其中該第二 16 _ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·裝 訂 線· 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 六、申請專利範圍 處理室體可進一步包括一排熱槽,可相對該熱源而移動於 該排熱槽接觸到該熱源的第一位置,與該排熱槽隔離於該 熱源的第二位置之間。 67.如申請專利範圍第66項所述之裝置,其中更進一 步包括一可定義出單一環境的單一整合承體,該第一與第 二處理室體係置放於該單一環境內。 68·如申請專利範圍第62項所述之裝置,其中該第一 處理室體係經組態設計以對該工件施用某材質、將該材質 自該工件鈾刻移除、潤濕該工件及/或燥化該工件。 69·如申請專利範圍第62項所述之裝置,其中至少一 第一處理室體可包括一經組態設計以對該微電子工件施用 某材質的應用室體,以及一經組態設計以從該微電子工件 上蝕刻去除至少某部分材質的蝕刻室體。 70·如申請專利範圍第62項所述之裝置,其中至少一 第一處理室體可包括一經組態設計以對該微電子工件施用 銅質的應用室體,並且其中一第二處理室體包括了一經組 態設計以對該銅質進行退火處理之退火室體。 71.—種用於熱處理微電子工件之裝置,包括: 一可置放以接合並支撐該微電子工件的工件支架;以 及 一具有固體接合表面,並經置放以接合於該微電子工 件之一表面的熱源,而該熱源可進一步包括一直接附接及/ 或整合於該熱源的熱產生器,該熱源與該工件支架中至少 一者,係可相對另者而移動於該微電子工件接觸該熱源接 17 -------------Aw --- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)This paper size is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. The method of distribution of the cross-sectional area of the patent application connector and the movement process of the current through the connector The size modulation produces a resistance heating effect that is at least equal to the heat loss through the connector due to heat conduction. 38. The device according to item 37 of the scope of patent application, wherein the connector has at least a part of a conical shape, and the diameter of the connector toward the first end point is larger than that of the connector toward the second end point. The outer edge of the connector is a curve on a plane, and the plane is parallel to a straight axis extending between the first end and the second end. 39. The device according to item 37 of the scope of patent application, wherein when the microelectronic workpiece is placed on the workpiece holder, the electronic terminal portion is placed adjacent to the outer edge of the microelectronic workpiece. 40. The device described in item 37 of the scope of patent application, wherein at least one of the heat source and the workpiece holder can be opposite to the other, and moved at a first position where the microelectronic workpiece contacts the heat source joint surface, and the The microelectronic workpiece is isolated between the second positions of the joint surface. 41. The device described in item 37 of the scope of patent application, further comprising a base assembly supporting the heat source; and a chamber cover, which can be moved between the open position and the closed position relative to the base assembly, and The cover and the base assembly are placed so that the microelectronic workpiece can be received therebetween when the cover is in the open position, and the cover and the base assembly can be received when the cover is in the closed position. The microelectronic workpiece is at least partially encapsulated. 42. The device described in item 37 of the scope of patent application, wherein the heat source 10 --------------- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) ·-- Line _ Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, Consumer Cooperatives. The paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8. 6. The scope of patent application is adjusted by size so that the micro When the electronic workpiece is closest to the heat source, heat can be transferred to the microelectronic workpiece at a rate sufficient to anneal the selected material of the microelectronic workpiece. 43. The device described in item 37 of the scope of patent application, further comprising a microelectronic workpiece. 44_ A device for heat-treating a microelectronic workpiece, comprising: a workpiece holder configured to support the microelectronic workpiece; and a heat source disposed adjacent to the workpiece holder and having a previously configured setting, In a low temperature process, heat can be transmitted to the first area of the microelectronic workpiece at a first rate of a certain unit area of the microelectronic workpiece. The heat source can further include a configuration that can be used in the low temperature process. Heat is transferred to the second area of the microelectronic workpiece at a second rate per unit area of the microelectronic workpiece, and the second rate per unit area is higher than the first rate per unit area. 45. The device according to item 44 of the scope of patent application, wherein at least one of the workpiece holder and the heat source is relative to the other, and is moved by the heat source to be bonded to the microelectronic workpiece, and then to and from the microelectronic workpiece. The first position transmitting heat is isolated from the second position of the heat source between the microelectronic workpiece. Printed by a member of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and a consumer cooperative. 46. The device described in item 44 of the scope of patent application, wherein the microelectronic workpiece includes an outer area and an inner area placed inward from the outer area, and Further, when the microelectronic workpiece is supported by the workpiece holder, the first region of the heat source is aligned with the inner region of the microelectronic workpiece, and the second region of the heat source is aligned with the outer region of the microelectronic workpiece. 47. The device described in item 44 of the scope of patent application, including the paper size applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A8 B8 C8 — ~~ --- [一-六The scope of the patent application is ~~ and the second resistance heater is set to supply heat to the first area; and the second and fourth resistance heaters are set to supply heat to the area of the table. V: 48 The device according to item 44 of the scope of patent application, wherein the heat source 槪 is circular and has a center point and a radius. Furthermore, the first area is placed radially from the second area toward the inside. And where the second rate per unit area is about 7.5% higher than the first rate per unit area, and the fraction does not correspond to the distance from the second area to the center of the heat source divided by the heat source radius. The device according to item 44 of the scope of the patent application, wherein the heat source 槪 is circular and has a radius and a circle center. Furthermore, the power of each leased area of the microelectronic substrate generated by the heat source will be from the circle center according to the radiation direction. Outward It is gradually increased across at least one part of the heat source. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 50. The device described in the scope of patent application No. 44 wherein the heat source has an external edge source and from the external edge source The inner edge facing inward, and further, the electric power per unit area of the microelectronic substrate generated by the heat source will be directed inward from the external edge source in the direction of radiation, at least across a portion of the heat source and gradually increase. The device according to item 44 of the patent application, wherein the heat source includes at least one resistive element having a contact area to be coupled to a power source, and further, the second area is compared to the first area. Placement can be closer to the contact area. 12 This paper size is applicable to Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 6. Application scope 52. Such as the scope of patent application No. 44 The device described above, wherein the heat source 槪 is round and includes an extended resistance heater having 槪 is a fixed cross-sectional area, and wherein the heater A small part is double-stacked for self-reliance, and extends along a plurality of separated circular lines in the first area and the second area. The circular lines in the first area are at a first distance from each other. The space is separated, and the toroidal lines in the second area are separated from each other by a second distance smaller than the first distance. I 53. The device according to item 44 of the scope of patent application, wherein the heat source includes a A substrate having a substrate surface area, and a resistance heater adjacent to the substrate and having a heater impedance surface area, the heater impedance surface area being approximately 67% of the substrate surface area. 54. As described in item 44 of the scope of patent application Device, wherein the heat source includes a first resistance heater coupled to a first controller in a first area, and a second resistance heater coupled to a second controller in a second area The controller can independently control the first and second controllers to provide power to the first area in a manner independent of providing power to the second area. 55. A device for heat treating a microelectronic workpiece, comprising: a workpiece holder configured to support the microelectronic workpiece; and a heat source placed adjacent to the workpiece holder for transmission during a low temperature process Heat is given to the microelectronic substrate; a first row of heat sinks is placed to cool the heat source closest to the heat source; and A second row of heat sinks, placed next to the first row of heat sinks and chilled 13 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back first (Fill in this page again.) · Assembly-line · Printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and printed by the Employees' Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and the Consumers' Cooperatives of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. 56. The device according to item 55 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first row of heat sinks can be moved relative to the heat source and the second row of heat sinks, while being moved in the first row of heat sinks and joined to the heat source to cool the heat source The first position 'and the first row of heat sinks are engaged with the second row of heat sinks to cool the second position of the first row of heat sinks. 57. The device as described in claim 55, wherein the heat source is placed on the first row of heat sinks. 58. The device described in claim 55, wherein the workpiece holder is movable at a joining position where the microelectronic workpiece is joined to the heat source, and a disengaging position with the microelectronic workpiece is disengaged from the heat source . 59. The device described in claim 55, further comprising a microelectronic workpiece. 60 · —A device for annealing a microelectronic workpiece 'includes: a device holder; a base relatively fixed to the device holder; a chamber cover, which is placed adjacent to the base and can be opposite to the base The base is moved between an open position and a closed position for receiving the microelectronic workpiece, and when the chamber cover is located in the closed position, the chamber cover and the base can define an annealing chamber body; a workpiece holder is placed Between the cover and the base, to join and support the microelectronic workpiece; a heat source, relatively fixed to the base, and placed to transmit heat to the microelectronic workpiece in a low temperature program; 14 This paper size is applicable to the country of China Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) —-------- hi equipment— (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) Order · 丨 Line-495885 Intellectual Property of the Ministry of Economic Affairs Bureau employee consumer cooperative printed storage C8 _____ D8 VI. Patent application scope-A first row of heat sinks can be moved relative to the heat source at a first position where the first row of heat sinks is joined to the heat source and connected to the first row of heat The tank is isolated from the heat source Between two positions; and a second row of heat sinks, which can be fixed relative to the base, and have a joint surface ′ for engaging the first row of heat sinks, and when the first row of heat sinks is in the second position At this time, heat from the first row of heat sinks can be transferred. 61. The device according to item 60 of the patent application scope, further comprising a first bellows actuator connected to the chamber cover and coupled to a source of pressurized fluid to move the chamber cover in an open position and a closed position Between; and a second bellows starter connected to the first row of heat sinks and coupled to a source of pressurized fluid to move the first row of heat sinks between an engaged position and a disengaged position. 62. An apparatus for heat-treating a microelectronic workpiece, comprising: at least a first processing chamber body, and when a first process is performed on the microelectronic workpiece, it has a first configured to support the microelectronic workpiece. Workpiece holder; the second processing chamber body may have a second workpiece holder placed to engage and support the microelectronic workpiece, the second processing chamber body may further have a heat source 'and the solid joining surface is placed to Is bonded to a surface of the microelectronic workpiece, and at least one of the heat source and the second workpiece holder can move relative to the other, and is moved to a first position where the microelectronic workpiece contacts the heat source bonding surface, and the microelectronic The workpiece is isolated between the second position of the heat source joint surface and the heat source is sized and adjusted when the first microelectronic workpiece is joined to the 15 paper sizes. Applicable to China Paper Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297) (Mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) · Installation · -I line · 495885 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs A8 B8 C8 D8 6. Scope of patent application When the heat source is used, the microelectronics is heat-treated at a rate sufficient to heat-treat the microelectronics in the low-temperature process, and the heat is transferred to the microelectronics; and a workpiece transfer unit can be placed adjacent to the first and At least one of the second processing chamber body, the workpiece transfer unit may be moved relative to the first and second processing chamber bodies, and the workpiece transfer unit may further include a configuration set to 'when the workpiece transfer unit is relative to the first When moving with the second processing chamber body, the workpiece can be joined to at least a workpiece joining portion of a microelectronic workpiece. 63. The device according to item 62 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first processing chamber system is one of at least two first processing chamber bodies, and further wherein the workpiece transfer unit is one of at least two workpiece transfer units One, and one of the workpiece transfer units may be placed to move the first microelectronic workpiece between a first processing chamber body and the second processing chamber body, and the other workpiece transfer unit may be placed to independently The second microelectronic workpiece is moved between another first processing chamber body and the second processing chamber body. 64. The device according to item 62 of the scope of patent application, wherein the workpiece transfer unit is one of two workpiece transfer units, each of which is configured to support a single microelectronic workpiece. 65. The device according to item 62 of the scope of patent application, further comprising a device holder capable of supporting the first processing chamber body, the second processing chamber body and the workpiece transfer unit, and further wherein the second processing chamber system It can move relative to the device support and the workpiece transfer unit, so that when the workpiece transfer unit supports the microelectronic workpiece, the second processing chamber body can be aligned with the microelectronic workpiece. 66. The device described in item 62 of the scope of the patent application, where the second 16 _ This paper size applies to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this (Page) · Binder 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 6. Patent application scope The processing chamber body can further include a row of heat sinks that can be moved relative to the heat source and contacted by the heat sink. The first position of the heat source is separated from the second position of the heat sink from the heat source. 67. The device as described in claim 66 of the scope of patent application, further comprising a single integrated carrier defining a single environment in which the first and second processing chamber systems are placed. 68. The device according to item 62 of the scope of patent application, wherein the first processing chamber system is configured to apply a material to the workpiece, remove the material from the workpiece uranium, wet the workpiece, and / Or dry the workpiece. 69. The device according to item 62 of the scope of patent application, wherein at least one first processing chamber body may include an application chamber body configured to apply a material to the microelectronic workpiece, and a configuration designed to remove the The microelectronic workpiece is etched to remove at least a part of the material of the etching chamber body. 70. The device according to item 62 of the scope of patent application, wherein at least one first processing chamber body may include an application chamber body configured to apply copper to the microelectronic workpiece, and one of the second processing chamber bodies Including an annealing chamber body configured to anneal the copper. 71. An apparatus for heat-treating a microelectronic workpiece, comprising: a workpiece holder that can be placed to engage and support the microelectronic workpiece; and a solid bonding surface that is placed to engage the microelectronic workpiece A surface heat source, and the heat source may further include a heat generator directly attached and / or integrated with the heat source, at least one of the heat source and the workpiece holder may be moved relative to the other to the microelectronic workpiece Contact this heat source and connect 17 ------------- Aw --- (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Γ 良 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 x 297公釐) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 合表面之第一位置,與該微電子工件隔置於該接合表面之 第二位置間,該熱源係經尺寸調制,而當該微電子工件接 合於該熱源時,以按足得熱處理該微電子工件之既選材質 的速率,將熱傳送給該微電子工件。 72·如申請專利範圍第71項所述之裝置,進一步包括 一排熱槽,耦接於一啓動器,並相對該熱源,移動於該排 熱槽接合到該熱源之第一位置,與該排熱槽卸離於該熱源 之第二位置間,該啓動器係可耦接至加壓冷卻流體源以移 動該啓動器,該啓動器具有按流體傳通於該排熱槽的流體 體積,藉以冷卻該排熱槽。 73.—種用於熱處理微電子工件之方法,包括: 將該微電子工件接合於一熱源的固體熱傳送表面; 以一直接附接及/或整合於該熱源之熱產生器,將熱導 延至該熱源內卜 ,線_ 並以足得於低溫製程中熱處理該微電子工件既選材質 的速率,將熱自其固體表面傳送到微電子工件;並且 將該微電子工件卸離於該固體表面。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 74·如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,進一步包括 可藉由將一置放鄰近該微電子工件某側之室蓋,接合於支 撐該固體熱傳送表面並置放鄰近於該微電子工件反側之基 座,而至少部分地包封該微電子工件,在此該微電子工件 係置放於該室蓋和該基座之間。 75·如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,進一步包括 冷卻該微電子工件。 ^紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐〉 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 六、申請專利範圍 76·如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,進一步包括 當該熱源接合於該微電子工件時,藉由將該排熱槽接合於 該熱源處以冷卻該微電子工件。 77. 如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其中該排熱 槽包括一可壓縮表面,且其中將該排熱槽接合於該熱源, 包括了將該排熱槽之可壓縮表面接合於該熱源,以及將該 可壓縮表面由未壓縮組態壓縮至既壓縮組態。 78. 如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其中更進一 步包括: 當該熱源接合於該微電子工件時,藉由將第一排熱槽 接合於該熱源處來冷卻該微電子工件;並且 藉由將第一排熱槽接合於第二排熱槽並供應冷卻液體 給該第二排熱槽來冷卻該第一排熱槽。 79·如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其中該微電 子工件係複數個微電子工件其一,更包含一次將一個微電 子工件接合於該熱源。 80·如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其更包含藉 由對該微電子工件施加真空狀態,俾汲引該微電子工件緊 密接合於該熱傳送表面。 81·如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其更包含藉 由向鄰接於該微電子工件的區域施加一淨除流體,以淨除 掉鄰接於該微電子工件之區域的氧化介質。 82·如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其更包含藉 電阻式加熱器來加熱該固體熱傳送表面。 19 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) •裝 訂V --線· 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 83. 如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其更包含: (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 藉電阻式加熱器來加熱該固體熱傳送表面;並且 藉由尺寸調制接附於加熱器連接終端的連接器以產生 電阻熱,而來在該加熱器連接終端處移補一傳導熱損失。 84. 如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其更包含: 以微電子工件每單位面積第一速率,來傳送熱給該微 電子工件的第一區域;及 以微電子工件每單位面積第二速率,來傳送熱給該微 電子工件的第二區域,該每單位面積第二速率係高於該每 單位面積第一速率。 85·如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其更包含當 該熱源接合於該微電子工件時,藉由將該排熱槽接合於該 熱源來冷卻該微電子工件,並且其中將該排熱槽接合於該 熱源,包括了對該排熱槽施用加壓冷卻流體,以便移動該 排熱槽與冷卻該排熱槽兩者。 86·如申請專利範圍第85項所述之方法,其更包含獨 立地控制冷卻流體的壓力與流率,以獨立地控制該熱源的 動作和溫度。 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 87.如申請專利範圍第85項所述之方法,其中施用加 壓冷卻流體包括塡滿一耦接於該排熱槽的風箱。 88·如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其中該排熱 槽係第一排熱槽,並且其中該方法更包括將該第一排熱槽 移離於該熱源處而朝向第二排熱槽,藉以冷卻該第一排熱 槽。 20 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 六、申請專利範圍 89·如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其中由固體 表面來傳送熱,包括按足供對選定材質進行退火處理之速 率來傳送熱。 90·如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其中該選定 材質包括一焊劑,並且其中由固體表面來傳送熱,包括按 足供重導該焊劑之速率來傳送熱。 91·如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其中該選定 材質包括一光阻層,並且其中由固體表面來傳送熱,包括 按足供修癒及/或烘烤該光阻層之速率來傳送熱。 92. 如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其中該選定 材質包括銅質,並且其中傳送熱給微電子工件,包括加熱 該微電子工件至從約攝氏210度到約290度的溫度而維持 約30秒到約90秒的時段。 93. 如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其中熱處理 該選定材質,包括對一按電子化學方式沉積於微電子工件 上之金屬層進行熱退火。 94. 如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其中熱處理 該選定材質,包括對一按電鍍方式沉積於微電子工件上之 金屬層進行熱退火。 95. 如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其中熱處理 該選定材質,包括對一按銅質層電子化學方式沉積於微電 子工件上之金屬層進行熱退火。 96. 如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其中熱處理 該選定材質,包括對一按銅質層電鍍方式沉積於微電子工 21 -- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Γ The size of the good paper is in accordance with Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 x 297 mm) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Application scope of patent (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) The first position of the surface Is separated from the microelectronic workpiece in a second position on the bonding surface, the heat source is dimensionally adjusted, and when the microelectronic workpiece is bonded to the heat source, the selected material of the microelectronic workpiece is heat-treated as needed At a rate that transfers heat to the microelectronic workpiece. 72. The device according to item 71 of the scope of patent application, further comprising a row of heat sinks coupled to a starter, and moved relative to the heat source at a first position where the heat sink is joined to the heat source, and The heat exhaust tank is detached between the second position of the heat source, and the starter can be coupled to a source of pressurized cooling fluid to move the starter. The starter has a fluid volume that passes through the heat exhaust tank according to the fluid. This cools the heat sink. 73. A method for heat-treating a microelectronic workpiece, comprising: bonding the microelectronic workpiece to a solid heat transfer surface of a heat source; using a heat generator directly attached and / or integrated with the heat source to conduct heat Extend to the heat source line, and transfer heat from its solid surface to the microelectronic workpiece at a rate sufficient to heat treat the microelectronic workpiece in a low temperature process; and detach the microelectronic workpiece from the solid surface. Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 74. The method described in item 73 of the scope of patent application, further comprising: attaching a chamber cover adjacent to one side of the microelectronic workpiece to the supporting solid heat The conveying surface places a base adjacent to the opposite side of the microelectronic workpiece and at least partially encloses the microelectronic workpiece, where the microelectronic workpiece is placed between the chamber cover and the base. 75. The method of claim 73, further comprising cooling the microelectronic workpiece. ^ Paper size is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 The method further includes, when the heat source is bonded to the microelectronic workpiece, cooling the microelectronic workpiece by bonding the heat sink to the heat source. 77. The method according to item 73 of the scope of patent application, wherein the The heat extraction tank includes a compressible surface, and wherein joining the heat extraction tank to the heat source includes joining the compressible surface of the heat extraction tank to the heat source, and compressing the compressible surface from an uncompressed configuration to 78. The method described in claim 73 of the scope of patent application, further comprising: when the heat source is connected to the microelectronic workpiece, cooling by joining a first row of heat sinks to the heat source The microelectronic workpiece; and cooling the first row of heat sinks by joining the first row of heat sinks to the second row of heat sinks and supplying cooling liquid to the second row of heat sinks. The method described in item 1, wherein the microelectronic workpiece is one of a plurality of microelectronic workpieces, and further includes joining one microelectronic workpiece to the heat source at a time. 80. The method according to item 73 of the scope of patent application, which further includes By applying a vacuum state to the microelectronic workpiece, the microelectronic workpiece is tightly bonded to the heat transfer surface. 81. The method described in item 73 of the scope of patent application, which further includes by A clearing fluid is applied to the area of the workpiece to cleanly remove the oxidizing medium adjacent to the area of the microelectronic workpiece. 82. The method as described in item 73 of the scope of patent application, which further comprises heating the resistive heater to heat the Solid heat transfer surface. 19 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this page) • Binding V-Line 6. Scope of patent application 83. The method described in item 73 of the scope of patent application, further includes: (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Use a resistance heater to heat the A solid heat transfer surface; and a connector attached to a heater connection terminal by size modulation to generate resistance heat to compensate for a conductive heat loss at the heater connection terminal. The method further includes: transmitting heat to the first area of the microelectronic workpiece at a first rate per unit area of the microelectronic workpiece; and transmitting heat to the first area of the microelectronic workpiece at a second rate per unit area of the microelectronic workpiece; In the second area of the microelectronic workpiece, the second rate per unit area is higher than the first rate per unit area. 85. The method according to item 73 of the scope of patent application, further comprising when the heat source is connected to the micro area. In the case of an electronic workpiece, cooling the microelectronic workpiece by joining the heat sink to the heat source, and wherein joining the heat sink to the heat source includes applying a pressurized cooling fluid to the heat sink to move the heat sink. Both the heat rejection tank and the cooling. 86. The method according to item 85 of the scope of patent application, further comprising independently controlling the pressure and flow rate of the cooling fluid to independently control the action and temperature of the heat source. Printed by the Employees' Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 87. The method described in item 85 of the scope of patent application, wherein applying the pressurized cooling fluid includes filling a bellows coupled to the heat sink. 88. The method of claim 73, wherein the heat-removing tank is a first-row heat tank, and wherein the method further includes moving the first-row heat tank away from the heat source toward the second-row The heat sink is used to cool the first row of heat sinks. 20 This paper size applies the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 6. Scope of patent application 89. The method described above, wherein the heat is transferred from the solid surface includes transferring heat at a rate sufficient to anneal the selected material. 90. The method of claim 73, wherein the selected material includes a flux, and wherein heat is transferred from a solid surface, including transferring heat at a rate sufficient to redirect the flux. 91. The method of claim 73, wherein the selected material includes a photoresist layer, and wherein heat is transmitted by a solid surface, including a rate for repairing and / or baking the photoresist layer according to a sufficient supply. To transfer heat. 92. The method of claim 73, wherein the selected material comprises copper, and wherein transmitting heat to the microelectronic workpiece includes heating the microelectronic workpiece to a temperature from about 210 ° C to about 290 ° C. Hold for a period of about 30 seconds to about 90 seconds. 93. The method as described in claim 73, wherein heat treating the selected material includes thermally annealing a metal layer deposited electro-chemically on a microelectronic workpiece. 94. The method of claim 73, wherein the heat treating the selected material includes thermally annealing a metal layer deposited on the microelectronic workpiece by electroplating. 95. The method of claim 73, wherein the heat treating the selected material includes thermally annealing a metal layer that is electro-chemically deposited on the microelectronic workpiece by a copper layer. 96. The method described in item 73 of the scope of patent application, wherein the selected material is heat treated, including a copper layer electroplating method deposited on the microelectronics 21-(Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) 言 Γ 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作杜印製 495885 頜 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 件上之金屬層進行熱退火。 97. 如申請專利範圍第73項所述之方法,其中傳送熱 包括按達攝氏450度的溫度,來傳送熱給該微電子工件上 的銅質部分。 98. —種用於形成複數個室體以熱處理微電子工件之方 法,可包括: 提供具有第一部份、鄰近於該第一部份的第二部份, 以及位於第一部份和第二部份間之第一腔穴的第一處理室 體,該第一腔穴係經組態設定以接收單一個微電子工件; 在該第一腔穴內沉置一第一熱源,該第一熱源係經組 態設定以按低溫製程來加熱該微電子工件; 置放鄰近於該第二部分的第三部份,而該些第二和第 三部份可於其間定義出經組態設定以接收另一個微電子工 件的第二腔穴;並且 在該第二腔穴內置放一第二熱源,而該第二熱源係經 組態設定以按低溫製程來加熱該微電子工件。 99. 如申請專利範圍第98項所述之方法,其更包括了 將該第二部分定位於該第一部分之下,並且將該第三部分 定位於該第二部分之下。 100. 如申請專利範圍第98項所述之方法,其更包括了 將第一工件支架置放於該第一腔穴內,該第一工件支 架係可相對該第一熱源而移動,而以將該第一微電子工件 接合於該第一熱源處;並且 22 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 x 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) · --線· 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 '中請專利範圍 將第二工件支架置放於該第二腔穴內,該第二工件支 架係可相對該第二熱源而移動,而以將該第二微電子工件 接合於該第二熱源處。 101·—種用以熱處理微電子工件之方法,包括: 一相對於該熱源支撐該微電子工件; 於低溫程序內將熱從該熱源傳送給該微電子工件; 當相對於該熱源而支撐著該微電子工件時,選擇性地 自該熱源傳送熱到該排熱槽,俾冷卻該熱源與該微電子工 件。 102·如申請專利範圍第101項所述之方法,其更包括 相互移動該微電子工件與該熱源至少其中之一,以將熱從 該熱源傳送到該微電子基板。 103·如申請專利範圍第101項所述之方法,其更包括 相對於該熱源’將該排熱槽由卸離位置移到接合位置處, 而當該排熱槽係於接合位置時該排熱槽會接合於該熱源, 以將熱從該熱源傳送到該微電子工件。 104·如申請專利範圍第101項所述之方法,其中該排 熱槽爲第一排熱槽,而其中該方法更包括: 藉由將該第一排熱槽移離於該熱源而鄰接於一第二排 熱槽,來將熱傳離自該第一排熱槽至該第二排熱槽;並且 將熱傳離於該第二排熱槽。 105·如申請專利範圍第101項所述之方法,其中將熱 自該熱源傳送到排熱槽,包括傳送熱而不傳送冷卻流體給 該排熱槽。 23 . --- (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁)Word Γ This paper size is in accordance with China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm), printed by the employee's Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 495885 Jaw C8 D8 VI. Patent Application The metal layer on the part is thermally annealed. 97. The method of claim 73, wherein transferring heat includes transferring heat to a copper portion of the microelectronic workpiece at a temperature of up to 450 degrees Celsius. 98. A method for forming a plurality of chambers to heat treat microelectronic workpieces, which may include: providing a second part having a first part, adjacent to the first part, and located on the first part and the second part A first processing chamber body of a first cavity between parts, the first cavity is configured to receive a single microelectronic workpiece; a first heat source is settled in the first cavity, and the first The heat source is configured to heat the microelectronic workpiece according to a low-temperature process; the third part adjacent to the second part is placed, and the second and third parts can define a configured setting therebetween To receive a second cavity of another microelectronic workpiece; and a second heat source is built in the second cavity, and the second heat source is configured to heat the microelectronic workpiece according to a low temperature process. 99. The method as described in item 98 of the scope of patent application, further comprising positioning the second part below the first part and positioning the third part below the second part. 100. The method according to item 98 of the scope of patent application, further comprising placing a first workpiece holder in the first cavity, the first workpiece holder is movable relative to the first heat source, and the The first microelectronic workpiece is bonded to the first heat source; and 22 paper sizes are applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) · --Line · 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs, please request the patent scope to place the second workpiece holder in the second cavity. The second workpiece holder can be opposite to the first cavity. The two heat sources move to join the second microelectronic workpiece to the second heat source. 101 · —A method for heat-treating a microelectronic workpiece, including: supporting the microelectronic workpiece relative to the heat source; transmitting heat from the heat source to the microelectronic workpiece in a low temperature program; and supporting the microelectronic workpiece relative to the heat source When the microelectronic workpiece is used, heat is selectively transmitted from the heat source to the heat sink, and the heat source and the microelectronic workpiece are cooled. 102. The method of claim 101, further comprising moving at least one of the microelectronic workpiece and the heat source to each other to transfer heat from the heat source to the microelectronic substrate. 103. The method according to item 101 of the scope of patent application, further comprising moving the heat sink from the disengaged position to the joint position relative to the heat source, and when the heat sink is in the joint position, the row A heat sink is coupled to the heat source to transfer heat from the heat source to the microelectronic workpiece. 104. The method according to item 101 of the scope of patent application, wherein the heat-removing tank is a first-row heat-removing tank, and wherein the method further comprises: adjoining the first-row heat-removing tank to the heat source by A second row of heat sinks to transfer heat away from the first row of heat sinks to the second row of heat sinks; and to transfer heat away from the second row of heat sinks. 105. The method of claim 101, wherein transferring heat from the heat source to the heat sink includes transferring heat without transferring a cooling fluid to the heat sink. 23. --- (Please read the notes on the back before filling this page) 言.« Γ -惠· fS尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) 495885 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 1〇6·如申請專利範圍第101項所述之方法,其中該排 熱槽爲第一排熱槽,而其中該方法更包括: 藉由將該第一排熱槽移離於該熱源而接合於一第二排 熱槽,來將熱傳離自該第一排熱槽至該第二排熱槽;及 藉由對該第二排熱槽施加冷卻流體,而將熱傳離該第 二排熱槽。 107·如申請專利範圍第101項所述之方法,其中支撐 該微電子工件,包括了單一個工件支架一次不支撐超過一 個以上的微電子工件。 108·如申請專利範圍第101項所述之方法,其更包括 透過孔洞來汲引真空而傳入該熱源,以偏導該微電子工件 朝向該熱源。 109. —種用以熱處理微電子工件之方法,包括: 將該微電子工件安置鄰近於該熱源; 以微電子工件每單位面積第一速率,而於低溫製程中 對熱源的第一區域傳送熱;並且 以微電子工件每單位面積第二速率,而於低溫製程中 對熱源的第一區域傳送熱,其中該單位面積第二速率係高 於該單位面積第一速率。 110. 如申請專利範圍第109項所述之方法,其更包括 加熱該微電子工件至一槪屬均勻之溫度。 111. 如申請專利範圍第109項所述之方法,其更包括 加熱該微電子工件至—選定狀態溫度’在該微電子工件表 面上約爲攝氏3度到攝氏4度的溫度範圍。 24 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ••裝 訂· --線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 495885 A8 B8 C8 _ D8 六、申請專利範圍 112·如申請專利範圍第109項所述之方法,其中該熱 源槪爲圓型,並具有一圓心和半徑,更進一步其中該第一 區域係按放射狀而由該第二區域朝內置放,並且其中按該 單位面積第二速率提供熱,包括按係約7.5%之分數高於該 單位面積第一速率來提供熱,該分數値係對應於第二區域 到熱源圓心的距離除以該熱源半徑之除數。 113·如申請專利範圍第109項所述之方法,其中該熱 源槪爲圓型,並具有一半徑和圓心,更進一步其中該方法 更包含依據微電子基板單位面積的速率之熱源,及/或會按 放射方向自圓心處朝外’而至少橫越於該熱源某部分而逐 漸增加之熱源,按此來產生電力。 114·如申請專利範圍第109項所述之法,其中該熱源 具有一外部邊源和自該外部邊源而朝內的內部邊緣,並其 中該方法進一步包括依據微電子基板單位面積的速率之熱 源,及/或會按放射方向自圓心處朝外,而至少橫越於該熱 源某部分而逐漸增加之熱源,按此來產生電力。 II5·如申請專利範圍第109項所述之方法,其中該熱 源包括至少一個具有接觸區域以耦接至電力來源的電阻元 件,其中更進一步,提供熱給該第二區域,包括了提供熱 給鄰近該接觸區域的熱源。 116·如申請專利範圍第109項所述之方法,其更包括 控制供應給該熱源第一區域的電力,而與控制供應電力給 第二區域相互獨立。 117·—種用以熱處理微電子工件之方法,包括: 25 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 x 297公釐) (請先閲讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 訂v 495885 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 頜 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 將該微電子工件安置最鄰近於該熱源; 由熱源傳送足夠熱給微電子工件,以於低溫製程中, 熱處理該微電子工件某選定材質; 將第一排熱槽置放最鄰近該熱源處,以冷卻該熱源和 該微電子工件;並且 將第一排熱槽置放最鄰近一第二排熱槽,以冷卻該第 一排熱槽。 118. 如申請專利範圍第117項所述之方法,其中安置 該微電子工件包括將該微電子工件接合於該熱源。 119. 如申請專利範圍第117項所述之方法,其中置放 該第一排熱槽最鄰近該熱源,包括將該第一排熱槽接合於 該熱源。 120. 如申請專利範圍第117項所述之方法,其中置放 該第一排熱槽最鄰近該第二排熱槽,包括將該第一排熱槽 接合於該第二排熱槽。 12h如申請專利範圍第117項所述之方法,其中更包 括將該第一排熱槽從該熱源而向下移到該第二排熱槽。 122. 如申請專利範圍第117項所述之方法,其中熱處 理該微電子工件某選定材質,包括退火處理該選定材質。 123. —種用以熱處理微電子工件之方法,包括: 將該微電子工件安置於第一處理室體內; 當該微電子工件位於該第一處理室體內時,對該微電 子工件執行一第一製程; 將該微電子工件自該第一處理室體移出到一第二處理 26 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) " (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) ·裝 ir. --線· §88495885 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 ___ 六、申請專利範圍 室體;及 在低溫製程中,藉由將加熱固體表面接合於該微電子 工件,來對在該第二處理室體內的微電子工件加熱。 124·如申請專利範圍第123項所述之方法,其中冷卻 該微電子工件’包括將該排熱槽移動接合於該熱源,同時 該微電子工件仍接合於該熱源,然後將該排熱槽移動隔離 於該熱源以冷卻該排熱槽。 125·如申請專利範圍第123項所述之方法,其中該第 一處理室體爲至少兩個第一處理室體其中一者,而該第二 處理室體爲至少兩個第二處理室體其中一者,且其中該方 法更包括移動第一微電子工件於某第一處理室體與某第二 處理室體之間,並且獨立地移動某第二微電子工件於另一 第一處理室體與另一第二處理室體之間。 126·如申請專利範圍第123項所述之方法,其中一裝 置支架可支撐該第一處理室體和該第二處理室體,並且其 中該工件傳送單元可移動該微電子工件於第一與第二處理 室體之間,並且其中該方法更包括相對於該裝置支架和該 工件傳送單元而移動該第二處理室體,以令當該工件傳送 單元支撐該微電子工件時,該第二處理室體可齊準於該微 電子工件。 127.如申請專利範圍第123項所述之方法,其中加熱 該微電子工件’包括了將該微電子工件加熱至足可對該微 電子工件選定材質進行退火處理的溫度。 128·如申請專利範圍第123項所述之方法,.其中執行 27 ^紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公釐) " (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) •襄 ·_ -線· 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 六、申請專利範圍 第一製程包括對該微電子工件施加一銅質材質,並且進一 步其中熱處理該微電子工件包括對施加於該微電子工件之 銅質材質進行退火處理。 129.如申請專利範圍第123項所述之方法,其中執行 第一製程包括對潔淨該微電子工件、蝕刻該微電子工件及/ 或對該微電子工件施用一選定材質。 130·如申請專利範圍第123項所述之方法,其更包含 將該第一與第二處理室體以及該微電子工件,定位於可定 義某單一環境之單一整合承體內。 131. —種用以對微電子工件退火之方法,包括: 在應用室體內,一次對眾多微電子工件一者施加一材 質層; 將微電子工件,自應用室體一次至少一個移動到退火 室體; 藉由移動各個微電子工件朝向某熱源,並將各個微電 子工件接合於該熱源的固體表面來傳送熱給各個微電子工 件,以此來對施加於微電子工件之材質進行退火; 藉由移動排熱槽而接合於熱源以冷卻各個微電子工件 ,同時該微電子工件仍接合於該熱源;並且 藉由將該熱源卸離於微電子工件,將排熱槽接合於一 作用中冷卻組件,並提供冷卻流體流入該冷卻組件內,按 此來冷卻該排熱槽。 132. 如申請專利範圍第131項所述之方法,其更包含 將該: 28 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 訂· -線· ^紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(210 X 297公爱) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 六、申請專利範圍 藉由將室體之一室蓋移離於某室體基座,而開啓該退 火室體; 僅將單一微電子工件插置於該室體內; 將該微電子基板支撐在該室體內的可移動式基板支架 上’朝向該基座,並關閉該室體而將其接合於基板支架; 並且 相對於該熱源,移動該基板支架與微電子工件。 133·—種用以熱處理微電子工件之方法,包括: 將該微電子工件接合於某熱源的固體熱傳導表面; 利用直接地接附及/或與該熱源整合的熱產生器,將 導入該熱源; 自固體表面處傳送足夠熱給該微電子工件,以熱處理 該微電子工件某選定材質;以及 將該微電子工件卸離於該固體表面處。 I34·如申請專利範圍第項所述之方法,其吏包含 利用電阻式加熱器來加熱該固體熱傳導表面。 (請先閱讀背面之注意事項再填寫本頁) 裝 線· 經濟部智慧財產局員工消費合作社印製 本紙張尺度適用中國國家標準(CNS)A4規格(21〇 x 297公釐)«Γ-Hui · fS scale is applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) 495885 Printed by A8 B8 C8 D8 of the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 6. Scope of patent application 106 The method described in claim 101, wherein the heat removal tank is a first heat removal tank, and wherein the method further includes: bonding the second heat removal tank to a second heat source by moving the first heat removal tank away from the heat source. A heat sink to transfer heat from the first row of heat sinks to the second row of heat sinks; and applying a cooling fluid to the second row of heat sinks to transfer heat away from the second row of heat sinks. 107. The method according to item 101 of the patent application scope, wherein supporting the microelectronic workpiece includes a single workpiece holder not supporting more than one microelectronic workpiece at a time. 108. The method according to item 101 of the scope of patent application, further comprising drawing a vacuum through a hole and introducing the heat source to deviate the microelectronic workpiece toward the heat source. 109. A method for heat-treating a microelectronic workpiece, comprising: placing the microelectronic workpiece adjacent to the heat source; transmitting heat to a first region of the heat source at a first rate per unit area of the microelectronic workpiece in a low temperature process And at a second rate per unit area of the microelectronic workpiece, and transferring heat to the first area of the heat source in a low temperature process, wherein the second rate per unit area is higher than the first rate per unit area. 110. The method of claim 109, further comprising heating the microelectronic workpiece to a uniform temperature. 111. The method according to item 109 of the patent application scope, further comprising heating the microelectronic workpiece to a selected state temperature 'on the surface of the microelectronic workpiece at a temperature range of about 3 ° C to 4 ° C. 24 This paper size applies to China National Standard (CNS) A4 (210 X 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) • Binding ·-Line · Printed by the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs and Consumer Cooperatives System 495885 A8 B8 C8 _ D8 VI. Patent Application Range 112 · The method described in item 109 of the patent application range, wherein the heat source is circular and has a center and radius, and further the first area is in accordance with Radially placed from the second area toward the inside, and in which heat is provided at the second rate per unit area, including providing heat at a fraction of approximately 7.5% higher than the first rate per unit area, the fraction corresponding to The distance from the second area to the center of the heat source divided by the divisor of the heat source radius. 113. The method of claim 109, wherein the heat source 槪 is circular and has a radius and a center of a circle. Furthermore, the method further includes a heat source based on a rate per unit area of the microelectronic substrate, and / or A heat source that will gradually increase from the center of the circle outwards at least in a direction of radiation and at least cross a portion of the heat source to generate electricity. 114. The method as described in claim 109, wherein the heat source has an external edge source and an internal edge facing inward from the external edge source, and wherein the method further includes a method based on a rate per unit area of the microelectronic substrate. The heat source, and / or the heat source that will be outward from the center of the circle in the direction of radiation, and at least gradually increase across a portion of the heat source, generate electricity according to this. II5. The method as described in claim 109, wherein the heat source includes at least one resistive element having a contact area for coupling to a power source, and further, providing heat to the second area includes providing heat to A heat source adjacent to the contact area. 116. The method according to item 109 of the scope of patent application, further comprising controlling power supplied to the first area of the heat source, and being independent of controlling power supplied to the second area. 117 · —A method for heat-treating microelectronic workpieces, including: 25 This paper is sized to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 (21 × 297 mm) (Please read the precautions on the back before filling this page) Binding v 495885 Printed jaws C8 D8 by the Consumer Cooperative of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs 6. The scope of the patent application places the microelectronic workpiece closest to the heat source; the heat source transmits sufficient heat to the microelectronic workpiece for heat treatment in the low temperature process. A selected material for the microelectronic workpiece; placing the first row of heat sinks closest to the heat source to cool the heat source and the microelectronic workpiece; and placing the first row of heat sinks closest to a second row of heat sinks to Cool the first row of heat sinks. 118. The method of claim 117, wherein placing the microelectronic workpiece includes bonding the microelectronic workpiece to the heat source. 119. The method of claim 117, wherein placing the first row of heat sinks closest to the heat source includes joining the first row of heat sinks to the heat source. 120. The method of claim 117, wherein placing the first row of heat sinks closest to the second row of heat sinks includes joining the first row of heat sinks to the second row of heat sinks. 12h The method according to item 117 of the scope of patent application, further comprising moving the first row of heat sinks downward from the heat source to the second row of heat sinks. 122. The method as described in claim 117, wherein a selected material of the microelectronic workpiece is thermally processed, including annealing the selected material. 123. A method for heat-treating a microelectronic workpiece, comprising: placing the microelectronic workpiece in a first processing chamber; and when the microelectronic workpiece is located in the first processing chamber, performing a first step on the microelectronic workpiece. A process; removing the microelectronic workpiece from the first processing chamber body to a second processing 26 paper size applicable to China National Standard (CNS) A4 specifications (210 X 297 mm) " (Please read the note on the back first (Please fill in this page again for matters). • ir.-Line. § 88495885 Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs. Ⅵ. Patent application scope; and in the low temperature process, by heating the solid surface The microelectronic workpiece heats the microelectronic workpiece in the second processing chamber. 124. The method of claim 123, wherein cooling the microelectronic workpiece includes moving the heat sink to the heat source while the microelectronic workpiece is still engaged to the heat source, and then removing the heat sink Moving away from the heat source to cool the heat sink. 125. The method of claim 123, wherein the first processing chamber is one of at least two first processing chambers, and the second processing chamber is at least two second processing chambers One of them, and wherein the method further includes moving the first microelectronic workpiece between a first processing chamber body and a second processing chamber body, and independently moving a second microelectronic workpiece between the other first processing chamber Between the body and another second processing chamber body. 126. The method according to item 123 of the application, wherein a device support can support the first processing chamber body and the second processing chamber body, and wherein the workpiece transfer unit can move the microelectronic workpiece between the first and second processing chambers. Between the second processing chamber body, and wherein the method further includes moving the second processing chamber body relative to the device support and the workpiece transfer unit, so that when the workpiece transfer unit supports the microelectronic workpiece, the second processing chamber body The processing chamber body can be aligned with the microelectronic workpiece. 127. The method of claim 123, wherein heating the microelectronic workpiece 'includes heating the microelectronic workpiece to a temperature sufficient to anneal the selected material of the microelectronic workpiece. 128 · The method described in item 123 of the scope of patent application, in which the implementation of 27 ^ paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (210 X 297 mm) " (Please read the precautions on the back before filling in this Page) • Xiang · _-line · 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 Printed by the Consumers' Cooperative of Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs VI. Patent application scope The first process includes applying a copper material to the microelectronic workpiece, and further heat treating the microelectronic workpiece. The electronic workpiece includes annealing the copper material applied to the microelectronic workpiece. 129. The method of claim 123, wherein performing the first process includes cleaning the microelectronic workpiece, etching the microelectronic workpiece, and / or applying a selected material to the microelectronic workpiece. 130. The method according to item 123 of the patent application scope, further comprising positioning the first and second processing chamber bodies and the microelectronic workpiece in a single integrated support body that can define a single environment. 131. A method for annealing microelectronic workpieces, including: applying a material layer to one of a plurality of microelectronic workpieces at a time in the application chamber; moving the microelectronic workpieces from the application chamber to the annealing chamber at least one at a time By moving each microelectronic workpiece toward a heat source, and bonding each microelectronic workpiece to the solid surface of the heat source to transfer heat to each microelectronic workpiece, thereby annealing the material applied to the microelectronic workpiece; A heat source is connected to a heat source by moving the heat sink to cool each microelectronic workpiece, while the microelectronic workpiece is still connected to the heat source; and the heat sink is joined to a function to cool by removing the heat source from the microelectronic workpiece. Module, and provides cooling fluid to flow into the cooling module to cool the heat sink. 132. The method described in item 131 of the scope of patent application, which further includes the following: 28 (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page) Binding · -line · ^ Paper size applies Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 Specifications (210 X 297 public love) 495885 A8 B8 C8 D8 VI. Application scope of patent By moving one of the chamber covers away from the base of a certain chamber, the annealing chamber is opened; only a single microelectronic workpiece is inserted Placed in the chamber; supporting the microelectronic substrate on a movable substrate support in the chamber; toward the base; and closing the chamber to join the substrate support; and moving the relative to the heat source Substrate holder and microelectronic workpiece. 133 · —A method for heat-treating a microelectronic workpiece, comprising: bonding the microelectronic workpiece to a solid heat-conducting surface of a heat source; using a heat generator directly attached and / or integrated with the heat source to introduce the heat source Transmitting sufficient heat from the solid surface to the microelectronic workpiece to heat treat a selected material of the microelectronic workpiece; and removing the microelectronic workpiece from the solid surface. I34. The method as described in item 1 of the scope of the patent application, which comprises heating the solid heat-conducting surface with a resistive heater. (Please read the precautions on the back before filling out this page.) Assembly · Printed by the Consumer Cooperatives of the Intellectual Property Bureau of the Ministry of Economic Affairs This paper size is applicable to the Chinese National Standard (CNS) A4 specification (21 × 297 mm)
TW90102866A 2000-02-09 2001-02-09 Method and apparatus for processing a microelectronic workpiece at an elevated temperature TW495885B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US09/501,002 US6471913B1 (en) 2000-02-09 2000-02-09 Method and apparatus for processing a microelectronic workpiece including an apparatus and method for executing a processing step at an elevated temperature
US09/733,608 US6780374B2 (en) 2000-12-08 2000-12-08 Method and apparatus for processing a microelectronic workpiece at an elevated temperature

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW495885B true TW495885B (en) 2002-07-21

Family

ID=27053689

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW90102866A TW495885B (en) 2000-02-09 2001-02-09 Method and apparatus for processing a microelectronic workpiece at an elevated temperature

Country Status (5)

Country Link
EP (1) EP1254477A2 (en)
JP (1) JP2003524299A (en)
AU (1) AU2001238149A1 (en)
TW (1) TW495885B (en)
WO (1) WO2001059815A2 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI484548B (en) * 2012-12-28 2015-05-11
TWI579228B (en) * 2011-05-18 2017-04-21 應用材料股份有限公司 Electrochemical processor

Families Citing this family (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE102005014513B4 (en) * 2005-03-30 2011-05-12 Att Advanced Temperature Test Systems Gmbh Device and method for tempering a substrate, and method for producing the device
MD3512C2 (en) * 2005-10-28 2008-09-30 Институт Электронной Инженерии И Промышленных Технологий Академии Наук Молдовы Device for magnesium diboride obtaining
MD175Z (en) * 2008-02-25 2010-10-31 Институт Электронной Инженерии И Промышленных Технологий Академии Наук Молдовы Device for the obtaining of superconducting films
EP2301081A2 (en) * 2008-06-03 2011-03-30 Vserv Technologies Corp System for simultaneous tabbing and stringing of solar cells

Family Cites Families (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
DE3719952A1 (en) * 1987-06-15 1988-12-29 Convac Gmbh DEVICE FOR TREATING WAFERS IN THE PRODUCTION OF SEMICONDUCTOR ELEMENTS
WO1991004213A1 (en) * 1989-09-12 1991-04-04 Rapro Technology, Inc. Automated wafer transport system
EP1120817B8 (en) * 1991-03-26 2007-10-10 Ngk Insulators, Ltd. Use of a corrosion-resistant member
US5802856A (en) * 1996-07-31 1998-09-08 Stanford University Multizone bake/chill thermal cycling module
JP2953395B2 (en) * 1996-09-05 1999-09-27 日本電気株式会社 Sputtering equipment
US6072163A (en) * 1998-03-05 2000-06-06 Fsi International Inc. Combination bake/chill apparatus incorporating low thermal mass, thermally conductive bakeplate
JPH11354260A (en) * 1998-06-11 1999-12-24 Shin Etsu Chem Co Ltd Multiple-layered ceramic heater

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI579228B (en) * 2011-05-18 2017-04-21 應用材料股份有限公司 Electrochemical processor
TWI484548B (en) * 2012-12-28 2015-05-11

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2001059815A2 (en) 2001-08-16
EP1254477A2 (en) 2002-11-06
JP2003524299A (en) 2003-08-12
WO2001059815A3 (en) 2002-02-21
AU2001238149A1 (en) 2001-08-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US6780374B2 (en) Method and apparatus for processing a microelectronic workpiece at an elevated temperature
US6471913B1 (en) Method and apparatus for processing a microelectronic workpiece including an apparatus and method for executing a processing step at an elevated temperature
TW473781B (en) Temperature controlled component, component for a plasma chamber and method of processing a semiconductor substrate in a plasma chamber containing the component
CN101681874B (en) Semiconductor device manufacturing method, semiconductor manufacturing apparatus and storage medium
US7194199B2 (en) Stacked annealing system
CN101421831B (en) Apparatus for manufacturing semiconductor
TW478072B (en) Optimal anneal technology for micro-voiding control and self-annealing management of electroplated copper
US7311810B2 (en) Two position anneal chamber
US20060242967A1 (en) Termoelectric heating and cooling apparatus for semiconductor processing
JP2013033965A (en) Substrate processing apparatus, substrate processing facility, and substrate processing method
US6506994B2 (en) Low profile thick film heaters in multi-slot bake chamber
CN104347452A (en) Reflow treating unit & substrate treating apparatus
WO2005101471A1 (en) Processing equipment for object to be processed
TW200952081A (en) Semiconductor device manufacturing method, semiconductor manufacturing apparatus and storage medium
JP4317608B2 (en) Deposition equipment
WO2011060212A1 (en) Apparatus for thermal processing with micro-environment
TW495885B (en) Method and apparatus for processing a microelectronic workpiece at an elevated temperature
CN109478529A (en) The processing chip of top plate as the Workpiece carrier in semiconductor and mechanical treatment
US20110039410A1 (en) Apparatus and Method for Substrate Electroless Plating
CN105441876B (en) A kind of film deposition equipment
TWI267922B (en) Method of annealing metal layers
CN103460352A (en) Semiconductor manufacturing device and manufacturing method thereof
CN100485874C (en) Processing equipment for object to be processed
JP2001345313A (en) Substrate treating device
JP2004335684A (en) Heat treatment apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
GD4A Issue of patent certificate for granted invention patent
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees